a Uafecliol eee tL ab sZ MATHEMATICS a iLMI KITAB KHANA Kabir Street, Urdu Bazar, Lahore.Mr. Munawar Din Awé Mr. Nasim-ul-Isiam Prof. M. Aslam Kahut Mrs, Tanzeela Naz Mr, Irfan Hussain ‘Syed Saman Raza Mr. Faheem Hussain Mr. Afzaal Hussain All rights are reserved with the Publisher. Approved by the Punjab Curriculum Authority, Wahdat Colony, Lahore, Muhammad Hal NOC. No. FCA/12/123 Dated: 27-11-2012 > Ch. Asghar Ali Associate Professor Associate Professor (R) Govt. MAO, College, Lhr. Govt. M.A, College, Lhr. Prof. Abdul Rauf Khan Muhammad Moeen Associate Professor Assistant Professor Govt. MAO, College, Lhr. Govt. M.A.O, College, Lhr. > Muhammad Sharif Ghauri Assistant Professor (R) Govt, Islamia College, Railway Road, Lhr. Muhammad Akhtar Shirani SS, PCTB Members of Review Committee: Prof. Dr. Shahid Mubeen Mathematics Department, Sargodha University, Sargoaha jan AEA(R), Curriculum Wing, Federal Mnisty of Education (Defunct), Islamabad DEAR], Curculum Wing, Federal Ministry of Education (Defunct) Islamabad it Principal, Govt. Post Graduate Colle, Chakwal Mathomatcs Department, Islamabad College for Gis, G10/4, Islamabad ‘Govemment High School, Kot Ranjeet Sheikhupura Mr. Muhammad Azeem Assessment Expert, PEAS, Township, Lahore ‘Government higher Secondary School, Kanpur, Sheikhupura ‘Senior Subjoct Spociaist, Punjab Textbook Board, Lahore Deputy Director (Curiculum Wing), Punjab Textbook Boar, Lahore {Desk Officer, Punjab Curriculum Authorty, Wahdat Colony, Lafore Prepared by: ILMI KITAB KHANA Kabir Street, Urdu Bazar, Lahore. Composed by: Maqsood Graphies, Urdu Bazar, Lhr. Year of Edition | Impression | Copies Price Publication March, 2017 Ast Ast 35,000 | 121.00Unit No. Contents ALGEBRA Title Page No. ‘Theory of Quadratic Equations 7 Sets and Functions 74 5 FLEE 107Contents GEOMETRY 7 | [__ mntroduction to Trigonometry {5 | 8 | [__ Projection ofa side of a Triangle {im} 9 | [chords of a circle {17 | 10 J [__ Tangent toa Gircle {1 | 11 J [chords and ares {2 | 2 } ‘Angle in a Segment of a Circle { 211 } 13 } Practical Geometry-Circles { 2a | ° } [Answers {2a | * ] [___ symbols and abbreviations {2 | *. } Table of Logarithm { 260 } & J [__ stossany {2 | ° } [index {2} + ] [__ Reference Books {26 |In this unit, students will learn how to define quadratic equation. solve a quadratic equation in one variable by factorization. solve a quadratic equation in one variable by completing square. derive quadratic formula by using method of completing square. solve a quadratic equation by using quadratic formula. solve the equations of the type ax‘ + bx? + ¢ = 0 by reducing it to the quadratic form. i a solve the equations of the type a p(x) + 555 I (2 solve reciprocal equations of the type a (e + 3) +o[x+ 4 +e=0. solve exponential equations involving variables in exponents. solve equations of the type (x + a) (x +b) (x +) (x+d)=k whereat+b=c+d. solve radical equations of the types (i) \ax+b=ex+d, (i) \eta+\xeb=\xte, (iii) \x? + px + m+ x? +pxtn=q. )1.1. Quadratic Equation ‘An equation, which contains the square of the unknown (variable) quantity, but no higher power, is called a quadratic equation or an equation of the second degree. ‘A second degree equation in one variable x of the form a+ bx+c=0 , where a#0 and a, b, are real numbers, is called the general or standard form of a quadratic equation. Here a is the co-efficient of x2, b is the co-efficient of x and constant term is ¢. ‘The equations 3? — 7x + 6 = 0 and 3x? + 4x = 5 |Remember that: If'a=0in are the examples of quadratic equations. lax? + bx + c= 0, then it reduces to a linear equation bx + c= 0. 22—Tx + 6= 0s in standard form but 3x? + 4x = 5 is not in standard form. If) =0 in a quadratic equation ax? + bx + = 0, then it is called a pure quadratic equation. For ‘example x — 16 = 0 and 4x? = 7 are the pure quadratic ‘equations. 1.2 Solution of quadratic equations To find solution set of a quadratic equation, following methods are used: () factorization Gi) completing square 1.2) Solution by factorization: In this method, write the quadratic equation in the standard form as, a2 tbx+e=0 o If two numbers r and s can be found for equation (i) such that r + s = b and rs = ac, then ax* + bx + ¢ can be factorized into two linear factors. ‘The procedure is explained in the following examples. Solve the quadratic equation 3x2 6x = x + 20 by factorization. 3x? 6x =x+20 wo The standard form of (i) is. 3x2- 7x 24 a) 3,b=-T,c=-20 and ae=3x-20=-60 As -1245=—Tand-12x5=-60, so the equation (ii) can be written as 3x2- 12r+5x-20=0 ctivity: Factor or 3x(x-4) +5 (x- 4) =0 ox > (4) Gx+5) Either x-4=0 © or 3x45=0, thatis, Here3 4 are the solutions of the given equation. Thus, the solution set is ea 4 } RENTED Solve 5x? = 30x by factorization, Sx? = 30x /Remember that: Cancelling of x on 5x2—30x=0 which is factorized as Sxx-6)=0 Either 5x=0 or x-6=0 => x=0 or x=6 X= 0, 6 are the roots of the given equation, ‘Thus, the solution set is {0, 6} 1.2(i) Solution by completing square: To solve a quadratic equation by the method of completing square is illustrated through the following examples. EEDNEDD Solve the equation x* - 3x4 = 0 by completing square. P3450 ® Shifting constant term —4 to the right, we have wo 3r=4 Gi) Adding the square of x coefficient of s, that is, 2 ¢ 3 on both sides of equation (ii), we get os sn( faece and =1 are the roots ofthe given equation. ‘Thus, the solution set is (1, 4). (ERATED Solve the equation 2x? - 5x3 = 0 by completing square. ait 5x-320 Dividing each term by 2, to make coefficient of x equal to 1. vis} Remember that: For —_ our convenience, we make the Shifting constant term —3o the right | ¢0-efficient of 2° equal to 1 in the method of completing square. 3 3 3 3 @ Maltiply co-efficient of x with} i,5(~3) =-$ Now adding C y on both sides of the equation (i), we have See SPB (SP natn ( 5 32524425 a4 216 16 (48 or a4) = 16 ‘Taking square root of both sides of the above equation, we have > ok Either 7» 3 are the roots of the given equation, Thus, the solution set is f b 3}‘Write the following quadratic equations in the standard form and point out pure quadratic equations. w oe #25 @. +7) -3) Gi) ) w) wi 2. Solve by factorizat @ Gai) Gi) ) () wi) 5-9" x-3 3-4 3. Solve the following equations by completing square: @ B242e-150 @) — at+4r-a=0,a40 lle? -34x4+3=0 (iv) Le +metn=0,140 34+ 7x=0 3-2-1959 =0 ~e+ Bide eeiteedeo 8 3245 toad @ 4-349-$4 (®) Te+ 2a) + 3a? =5a (7 + 230) 1.3. Quadratic Formula: 1.3. (i) Derivation of quadratic formula by using completing square method. The quadratic equation in standard form is a@tbr+e=0 , a40 Dividing each term of the equation by a, we get eebrete Shifting constant term © to the right, we have & Be oxanG ‘Adding & ‘on both sides, we obtainb b b e Pie aabee Ge) Ga) Sada b\) b-4ac (codes ‘Taking square root of both sides, we get CBee or +a #0 is known as “quadratic formula”. 1.3 (i) Use of quadratic formula: The quadratic formula is a useful tool for solving all those equations which can or can not be factorized, The method to solve the quadratic equation by using quadratic formula is illustrated through the following examples. Example 1: Solve the quadratic equation 2 + 9x = 5x? by using quadratic formula Solution: 2+ 9x= 5x? ‘The given equation in standard form can be written as Sx2-9x-2=0 ‘Comparing with the standard quadratic equation ax? + bx + ¢=0, we observe that a=5,b=-9, c=2 Putting the values of a, b and c in | Activity: Using quadratic formula, quadratic formula write the solution set of x2 + = bth —dac x ba » we have (-9) + V9 = 45) (2) 268) +8144) _9+Ji2i 9+ “wo = 10 = 10 iu . that is,25 2,—$ate the roots ofthe given equation. ‘Thus, the solution set is es 24 EAT Using quadratic formula, solve the equation Qe+1 x-2 as ‘Simplifying and writing in the standard form xt O44) — = 2) +2)=0 ats Br4x44—(2-4)=0 dvs Ored-2 4420 or 49x+8=0 Here a=1,b=9,c=8 =0 =9 + JOP — 4x18 2x1 9 sf81=32 _-9 449 2 2 or 8 are the roots of the given equation. Thus, the solution set is (8, -1} =—4) EXERCISE 1 L Solve the following equations using quadratic formula: @ 2-8 =7e i) Se48r+1=0 (iii) VB 4x say (iv) 4? = 14 = 3x () 62-3-7=0 (vi) 3x°+8r+2=0 x42 4 (vii) (viii) (eo) (x) (+m) b2 + Ql +m) x=0, 140‘We now discuss different types of equations, which can be reduced to a quadratic equation by some proper substitution. ‘Type (i) The equations of the type axt+bx2 +c =0 Replacing x? = y in equation axt + bx? +¢=0, wwe get a quadratic equation in y. (EETTTED Solve the equation xt — 13:2 + 36 =0. SOM x4 137+ 36 Let Psy. Then ty? Equation (i) becomes y= 13y +36 =0 which can be factorized as y= 9y-4y +36=0 @ 30-9) = 40-9) =0 0-9 0-4)=0 Either y-9=0 or or Put y=? ead or = xst3 or The solution set is {42, +3} ‘i : be ‘Type Gi) The equations of the type aptx) +55 =¢ FEETITIEED Solve the equation 2(2x— 1) + 2 SSM Given that 202-1) +5 @ Let 2x-1=y. Then the equation (i) becomes ates or 2243 =5y > 2y?-Sy+3=0 Using quadratic formulaWhen y 2x-1=1 Co y=2x-)) > deelt1=2 > x51 Than. the ton sei Type (iii) Reciprocal equations of the type: (esd) so(co2)+e00 or at es besa ‘An equation is said to be a re yrocal equation, if it remains unchanged, when x is replaced| 1 bys Replacing x by *in ax! ~ bx! +.cx2— bx +a=0, we have a ey- b ay +e Qy- b 8 +a =0 which is simplified as a~ bx +x? — bx? + ax" = 0, We get the same equation. Thus ar! - bx? + ex? — bx + a= 0 is a reciprocal equation, ‘The method for solving reciprocal equation is illustrated through an example. EEENNIEED Sove the equation 2x4 — 5x3 ~ 14x?—5x+2=0, GEMM 2 — Sx? - 142 - 5x4 2= Dividing each term by x? Bei Se dx Se 2 eo et 3,2 xte Ler3)-sferd)-ue 2x2 Sx 14—bay. tense + haya So equation (i) becomes 202-2)-Sy-14=0 or 2y2—4~Sy—14=0 2y?— Sy- 18 =0 2y2 By +4y—18=0 oF y(2y—9)+2Qy-9)=0 > Qy-9H+2)=0 Either 2y-9=0 or -y+2=0 As yax+t, sowe have al 4 9=0 ty2=0 x4 5)-9= or xtyt2= 2x? -9x+2=0 or xP 42e+1=0 By quadratic formula, we get 29) +9? = 4x2 x2 -22JQP=4x1x1 2x2 re 2x1 _ 9 +81 = 16 =2sfa—4 2 = xe SNE or ore 965 =*=3 ore Thus, the solution set is {23 > B a2ve8 43 Ss ‘Type (iv) Exponential equations: In exponential equations, variable occurs in exponent. ‘The method of solving such equations is illustrated through an example. GREDTIZD Solve the equation 51+ 4 5!-*=26. S154 51,S%=26 or S54 EZ-26=0 i) Let 5*=y. Then equation (i) becomes 5 Sy +5 -26=0 Sy? +5 — 26y or Sy - 26y+5=0 5)2-25y-y+5=0 Sy (y- 5)- 1-5) =0 —5) Sy-1) Sy-1=0, thatis,Pat yao* S25) or 5 The solution setis {#1}. ‘Type (v) The equations of the type: (4a) +b) +0) (ata) =k, whereatb=c+d EEANTED Solve the equation (x- 1) (x +2) (x +8) (x + 9)=19. EMM («— 1) 6 + 2) +8) 45) = 19 or [@— I) & +8) [(x+2) (e+ 5)]-19=0 (o -148=245) (24 Tx= 8) (2 + Tx-+ 10) 19=0 @ Let BeTeay ‘Then eq, () becomes (y~ 8) (y+ 10) - 1 yi+2y-80-19 Ya 2y-99= yP+Ily-9y-99=0 y+ 11) -99+ 11) =0 o+1) 6-9) Bh Either y+ or y-9=0 Put y=a2+7x, 30 e+Tx41150 or 2+7x-9=0 Solving by quadratic formula, we have -14OP 4) OD) =1+ oP =40) a), “= 20) * 20) vr 214 36-74-85 ~ 2 ~ 2 TeVO~H__ 745 a2 74/5 -714+) 5 | rr | ——4J EXERCISE 1 Solve the following equations. 1 dxt= 12 +5=0 2 Wxtaor-4 3. Sita 7el4—2 4 E54 The solution set is & 6 Qe++ 3 Ie deel dx-1 ax-17 4x41 xt 2 2 4 2x 10I, 2xt4 8-62 4x42=0 12, 4.241-92"+1=0 13, 322 12."-3 14. 24642-2020 15. +1) (+3) (r= 5) (&=7) = 192 16. = 1x 2)(x- 8) + 5) + 360=0 1.5 Radical equations ‘An equation involving expression under the radical sign is called a radical equation eg, Vee3=x41 and fx-1=4fx—-241 1.5 (i) Equations of the type: \fax +b = cx +d ELEN ove the equation f3r47 = 2x +3 Ree T = 2x43 @ Squaring both sides of the equation (i), we get (3x47)? = Ox +3)? or Bxt 7240 + 12+ 9 ‘Simplifying the above equation, we have 42 4 9x42=0 Applying quadratic formula, _ 9 t VOP = 4x4 x2 [Note: Extraneous root is introduced either by squaring the given ‘equation or clearing it 2x4 of fractions. _ 29 ty81— 32-9 449 ~ 8 8Putting x= ~2 in the equation (i), we get 3(2) +7 =2(-2)+3 = YI=-1 which is not true. On checking, we find that x = -2 does not satisfy the equation (i), so it is extraneous root. Thus the solution set is ie At 1.5 (ii) Equations of the type x +a +-\x+b =x +e RTE sotve the equation ee +Ve46=VeF VesS tyre 6=yre @ ‘Squaring both sides of the equation (i), we have x+3 424642 (\fe43) (x6) or Nx 49x + 1B =—x +2 Gi) ‘Squaring both sides of the equation (ii), we get 402 49x 4 18) =? - 4044 or 3x? + 40x + 68 =0 Applying quadratic formula, we get 740 G0)? 43x68 _ ~40 + -f1600-816 +i 2x3 6 40 4-784 _ 40+ 28 6 = 6 air biet i which is not tue Pit yin yy imnich is 34 As—3"is extraneous root, so the solution set is {2}1.5(iii) Equations of the type: \/x? + px +m+./x?+pxtn=q GEENVTEED Solve the equation fx? — 3x + 36 Vx? 3x49 =3. QM V2? — 3x + 36-3 +9 = Let 2-3r=y Then fy ¥36-yF9=3 ‘Squaring both sides, we get y+ 364 y 49-2 (y+ 36)(\y 49) =9 2y +45 -~ 20+ 36) G9) =9 ~ aye a5y +324 =—2y-36 or 2p? + 4Sy +324 = -2(y + 18) = VP aSy 324 =y + 18 Again squaring both sides, we get y+ 45y +324 = y? + 36y + 324 Sy=0 > ys0 As 8-3r=y,s0 => x(x-3)=0 Either x=0 or xe =0 > x53 x=0, 3 are the roots of the equation. Thus, the solution set is (0, 3}. —— EXERCISE Solve the following equations, 1 det S=2Teo 16 2, Vee3e3x-1 3. dears 14-3 4 Be¥100-x=4 5. aferS4yee ll =\e+ 0 6. et lane-2=Ver6 7, Vil-x-6-x=27-x 8, V4a4x-Va-x= Ja 9 \eexti-VePer-1=1 10, Peart 8 +P sart d= Peart 9 +P eae a5MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE - 1 1. Multiple Choice Questions Four possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (7) the correct (@ Standard form of quadratic equation is (a) br+c=0,b40 (b) axtsbr+e=0,a40 © at=bx,a#0 @ at=0,a20 Gi) The number of terms in a standard quadratic equation ax? + bx +.¢=Ois @ 1 ) 2 © 3 @ 4 (ii) ‘The number of methods to solve a quadratic equation is @ 1 ) 2 © 3 @ 4 (iv) The quadratic formula is bP —4ac bn[h —dac @ xe y= PEN ab +b? + dac btsfb? + dac © =e @ x22Se w) Two linear factors of x* — 15x + 56 are (a) (x-7) and (x + 8) (b) (x +7) and (x - 8) (c) (x-7) and (x - 8) (d) (x +7) and (x + 8) (i) An equation, which remains unchanged when x is replaced by +is called a/an (@) Exponential equation (®) Reciprocal equation (©) Radical equation (None of these (vii) An equation of the type 3° + 32-* +6 = 0 is a/an (a) Exponential equation (b) Radical equation (©) Reciprocal equation (A) None of these (viii) The solution set of equation 4x2 16 = 0 is (@) {£4} &) (4) © {£2} @) £2 (ix) An equation of the form 2x! ~ 3x? + 7x2 — 3x +.2.= Ois called a/an (a) Reciprocal equation (&) Radical equation (©) Exponential equation (@ _ None of these 2. Write short answers of the following questions. @ Solve x?+2x-2=0 (ii) Solve by factorization 5x? = 15x 1 ii) Write in standard form 3 +g = (iy) Write the names of the methods for solving a quadratic equation, Solve (ox - (vi) Solve J3x+183. wo (i) (iil) (iv) Ww) (wi) (vii), (wii) (ix) & Define exponential equation. (x) Fill in the blanks ‘The standard form of the quadratic equation is ‘The number of methods to solve a quadratic equation are ‘The name of the method to derive a quadratic formula is The solution of the equation ax* + bx += 0, a4 0is, ‘The solution set of 25x2— 1 = Ois Define radical equation. ‘An equation of the form 22° — 3.2* + 5 = 0 is called a/an equation. The solution set of the equation x7— 9 =0 is ‘An equation of the type x* +9 4x2 ++ 1 =0 called a/an_ equation, A root of an equation, which do not satisfy the equation is called ___ root. ‘An equation involving impression of the variable under __ is called radical equation, => JMMAR’ => ‘An equation which contains the square of the unknown (variable) quantity, but no higher power, is called a quadratic equation ot an equation of the second degree, A second degree equation in one variable x, ax? + bx + where a #0 and a, b, ¢ are real numbers, is called the gener: quadratic equation. ‘An equation is said to be a reciprocal equation, if it remains unchanged, when x is yr standard form of a replaced by + In exponential equations, variables occur in exponents. ‘An equation involving expression under the radical sign is called a radical equation, Quadratic formula for ax? + br +6=0,a40 is bap ~ 2a Any quadratic equation is solved by the following three methods. (Factorization Gi) Completing square (iii) Quadratic formulaIn this unit, students will learn how to 2% define discriminant (b* —4ac) of the quadratic expression ax? + bx + ¢. 2 find discriminant of a given quadratic equation. 2 discuss the nature of roots of a quadratic equation through discriminant. & determine the nature of roots of a given quadratic equation and verify the result by solving the equation. determine the value of an unknown involved in a given quadratic ‘equation when the nature of its roots is given. 2& find cube roots of unity. 23 recognize complex cube roots of unity as @ and co? 23 prove the properties of cube roots of unity. = = w use properties of cube roots of unity to solve appropriate problems. find the relation between the roots and the coefficients of a quadratic ‘equation. find the sum and product of roots of a given quadratic equation without solving it. 2 find the value(s) of unknown(s) involved in a given quadratic equation when © sum of roots is equal to a multiple of the product of roots, w © sum of the squares of roots is equal to a given number, © roots differ by a given number, © roots satisfy a given relation (e.g., the relation 24+ 5B = 7 where a and Bare the roots of given equation), ¢ both sum and product of roots are equal to a given number. 2% define symmetric functions of roots of a quadratic equation. 2 evaluate a symmetric function of the roots of a quadratic equation in terms of its coefficients.2m establish the formula, x? ~(sum of roots) x + (product of roots) = 0, to find a quadratic equation from the given roots. 2 form the quadratic equation whose roots, for example, are of the type: © 2a+1,2p+1, ° a, B, where 0 Bare the roots of a given quadratic equation. & describe the method of synthetic division. & use synthetic divisic ¢ find quotient and remainder when a given polynomial is divided by a linear polynomial, ¢ find the value(s) of unknown(s) if the zeros of a polynomial are given, ¢ find the value(s) of unknown(s) if the factors of a polynomial are given, ¢ solve a cubic equation if one root of the equation is given, @ solve a biquadratic (quartic) equation if two of the real roots of the equation are given. & solve a system of two equations in two variables when © one equation is linear and the other is quadratic, © both the equations are quadratic. & solve the real life problems leading to quadratic equations.2.1 Nature of the roots of a quadratic equation On solving quadratic equations, we get different kinds of roots. Now we will discuss the nature or characteristics of the roots of the quadratic equation without actually solving it, 2.1.1 Discriminant (6? - dac) of the quadratic expression ax? + bx +c. We know that two roots of the equation ax? + bx +¢=0,a40 @ b+ Pa dae, =P hae 2a fad 2a The nature of these roots depends on the value of the expression “b?— ac” which is called the “discriminant” of the quadratic equation (i) or the quadratic expression ar +brte. 2.1.2 To find the discriminant of a given quadratic equation. We explain the procedure to find the discriminant of a given quadratic equation through the following example: (GEETLED Find the discriminant of the following equations, are fa) 2? -Tx+1=0 (b) = 3x4+3=0 (dt Te+ ) P-3r43 Here a=2, c= Here 1,b=-3,¢=3 Disc. = b? - dac Disc. = b? - dac -7)? - 4(2) (1) 3)? = 4(1) 8) =49-8=41 =9-12=-3 2.1.3 Nature of the roots of a quadratic equation through discriminant. al dae The roots of the quadratic equation ax? + bx +e = 0, (a# 0) are = ana its discriminant is 6? — 4ac. When a, b and c are rational numbers. (@) If *—4ac > 0 and is a perfect square, then the roots are rational (real) and unequal. Gi) 1? - dac > 0 and is not a perfect square, then the roots are irrational (real) and unequal. If 5? —4ac =0, then the roots are rational (real) and equal. If? ~4ac <0, then the roots are imaginary (complex conjugates). Determine the nature of the roots of a given quadratic equation and verify the result by solving the equation. We illustrate the procedure through the following examples: Sa ‘Using discriminant, find the nature of the roots of the following equations and ‘verily the results by solving the equations (b) eed @ 7 +8r41 f@) P-Sx+ (© P+8x416=0(@ 2-5x+5=0 ‘Compare with the standard quadratic equation a2tbr+c=0 b=-Sand c=5 . = BP dae = (-5)*= 4(1) (5) = 25-20=5>0 As the Dise. is positive and is not a perfect square. Therefore, the roots are irrational (real) and unequal. Now solving the equation x? ~ Sx + 5 = 0 by quadratic formula = 4ac (5) + JSP — 40) G) _5+25-20_5+V5 2a) a2 8 Evidently, the roots are irrational (real) and unequal. (b) 2-4 1=0 Here a » b=-Land c=1 Disc. = b? - 4ac 1)*=4(2) (1) =1- As the Disc. is negative, therefore, the roots of the equation are imaginary and unequal. Verification by solving the equation. Qax+l ‘Using quadratic formula ba PF dae c+ I= 4) NE tae 202) <0 1+ Evidently, the roots are imaginary and unequal. © 22+ 8x + 16=0 Here a=1,b=8and Disc. = b?- dac 8)? - 4(1) (16) 64-64=0 ‘As the discriminant is zero, therefore the roots are rational (real) and equal 16Verification by solving the equation. 224 8x+16=0 (x+4)P=0 > xe-4-4 So the roots are rational (real) and equal @ = 7e+8r+1=0 Here 1, b= Bande Disc. = b? - 4ac = 6-47) 0) = 64-28 = 36 = (6) which is positive and perfect square. ‘The roots are rational (real) and unequal. ‘Now solving the equation by factors, we get T+ 8r+ 150 T+ Tet xt] Text +1 +20 G+) (xt Either x+1=0 or 7x4 1=0, thatis x=-1 or Ine-l => x= ‘Thus, the roots are (real) rational and unequal. 2.1.5 To determine the value of an unknown involved in a given quadratic ‘equation when nature of its roots is given. We illustrate the procedure through the following example: Find kif the roots of the equation (k+3)x2—2(k+ 1) x—(h+ 1) = O are equal, if k 4-3. (k+3)2-2k+ Dx-k+ D=0 Here a=k+3, b=-2(k +1) and e=-(k +1) As roots are equal, so Disc, = 0, that is, Be dac [-2k + P= 4(k +3) [Hk + =O Afk+ IP 44k +3)(k+1)=0 of 4k+1) K+ 1+k+3)=0 > AHN) kH4)=0 of BKH1)K+2=0 => kb1=0 or k+2= = kel or Thus, roots will be equal if=a 1. Find the discriminant of the following given quadratic equations: @ 28 43x-1=0 (i) 62 -8r+3=0 ii) 9x? - 30x +25=0 (iv) 4?-7x-2=0 2. Find the nature of the roots of the following given quadratic equations and verify the result by solving the equations: @ P= 23+120=0 Gi) 2v+3x47=0 Gil) 16° -24r+9=0 Gv) 3x +7x-13= 3. For what value of k, the expression Hx? + 2(k + 1) x + 4s perfect square. 4, Find the value of &, if the roots of the following equations are equal. @ —— Qk=1) 7 + 3ke+3=0 (i) 242k +2)x4BE+4)=0 Gi) Gk #2) 2-54 x4 2k+3)=0 5. Show that the equation x? + (mx + c)? = a? has equal roots, if aX + m2) 6 Find the condition that the roots of the equation (mx + c)?- 4ax=0 are equal, 7. If the roots of the equation (c? ~ ab) x2 - 2(a? — be) x + (b? — ac) = 0 are equal, then a=Oora’ +3 +c} = 3abe. 8. Show that the roots of the following equations are rational @ — ab- 9.2 + ea) x+c(a-b) Gi) (#26) 2+ 2at bert at20)=0 9. Forall values of &, prove that the roots of the equation eaakepee3eo, #0 ate real 10. Show that the roots of the equation (b=). # + (C-a)x+ (a-b)=0 are real. 2.2 Cube Roots of Unity and Their Properties. 2.2.1 The cube roots of unity. Let a number x be the cube root of unity, 13 1 = 8-1 ()-()3=0 (1) 024x410 [using a B= (a—b) (a2 + ab +22] 0 or eext1=0=1+VaP— ore 20) cleyi=4 -1tV3 = tiy8 2.7 2 2 Three cube roots of unity are —— and = where i=J=1. 2.2.2. Recognise complex cube roots of unity as @ and @. = a ana If we name anyone of these as (pronounced as omega), then the other is «, We shall prove this statement in the next article. 2.2.3 Properties of cube roots of unity. (a) Prove that each of the complex cube roots of unity is the square of the other. i+ y=3 2 DE The two complex cube roots of unity are Proof: ‘The complex cube roots of unity are We prove that G38) 2 G4 Fay ts AS). Thus, each of the complex cube root of unity is the square of the other, that is, al+y3 a1-\3 al+y3 2 2 2 (>) Prove that the product of three cube roots of unity is one. Proof: Three cube roots of unity are a14V3 | =v 1 and FS ifo= then a? =The product of ee oats of iy = (= I =A && en 3 _1 aa ie, )(@)(@)=1 oF o=1 (©) Prove that each complex cube root of unity is reciprocal of the other. Proof: We know that @?= 1 > 00> or Thus, each complex cube root of unity is reciprocal of the other. (@)__ Prove that the sum of all the cube roots of unity is zero. ie, 1+O+Q?= Proof: ‘The cube roots of unity are a3 a 1, and i" aly a The sum of all the roots = 1+ @ + Thus, 1+0+0%=0 We can easily deduce the following results, that is, @ — 1+@%=-0 (i) 1+@=-0 (iil) @ +0? =-1 2.2.4 Use of properties of cube roots of unity to solve appropriate problems. ‘We can reduce the higher powers of « into 1, @ and oo, eg OT=P.O= (17 0-0 (oo = (1)? oF = oFJ 1 ear ora! MD vrata 14 Ht. MMM G+ 5" eS bess) (2ea)8 + (20)8 = 256 w8 + 256 «6 56 [oat + col] 56 (0)? 0? + (0 0] =256 [o? + 0] re 56 (-1) = -256 GBTTED Prove tha x— y) (= @y) (&— @y), EMI ¥ - = &-y) &- oy) &- oy) RHS = (¢-y) (x~ ay) (xy) (°—y) Lx? aay oxy + 0y?] oe — y) [2 — ay (0? + 0) + 1)" (x= y) P= xy C1) + y4] ay) BE + ay +7] o-y=LHS EXER! = 1 Find the cube roots of -1, 8, -27, 64. 2. Evaluate @ (-@-0 @ (1 = 30-302) (ii) (9+ 4044025 Gy) 2 +20- 20%) 6-30 + 30%) 0) Cl4yB+C1-V! wy 48). 28) (il) oT +0%-5 ill) oP eo7 Prove that x' +? +2) —3xyz = (x+y +2) (+ wy + 0%) (+ y+ 2). Prove that (1 +@) (1+?) (1+ 4) (1 + 0%) .... 2n factors = 12.3 Roots and co-efficients of a quadratic equation. Se ee rade ang be ta ax’ + bx + ¢=0 where a, b ate coefficients of x? and x respectively. While c is the constant term. are roots of the equation 2.3.1 Relation between roots and co-efficients of a quadratic equation. ab +P aac =b- VP dac 2a 2 then we can find the sum and the product of the roots as follows. Sum of the roots = a+ 1 and f= nb ey dae | -b—fo? dae a 2a a 2b + = tac ~ b - VF— Fac _-2b = 2a 2a Product of the roots = a 4 Ib — 4ac (= [b2 - dae = 2a 2a Cop = Cf Aue)? _ 02 ~ 0? ~ ac) - 4a? 4a? Baw + da =Pott ewe denote the sum of roots and product of roots by S and P respectively, then b__ Cocificient of x Co-efficient of x? Constant term __ ‘o-efficient of 23.2 The sum and the product of the roots of a given quadratic equation without solving it. We illustrate the method through the following example. GTITED Without solving, find the sum and product of the roots of the equations. (2) 38-5r47=0 (b) xt 44x-9=0 ETD a) Let and Abe the roots of the equation 32-5r47=0 ‘Then sum of roots = + B= and product of roots = @= $= 3 (b) Let and fbe the roots of the equation 3x2 + 4x-9=0‘To find unknown values involved in a given quadratic equation. The procedure is illustrated through the following examples. (a) Sum of the roots is equal to a multiple of the product of the roots. (CEDTED Find the value of h, if the sum of the roots is equal to 3-times the product of the roots of the equation 3x? + (9 - 6h) x + Sh=0. QAM ct o, fe the roots of the equation 3x2 + (9 - 6h) x + Sh=0 b 8% Then ot B= 5 Since a+ B= 308) (Shy 3(2h-3) #3) or SQH=3)_ 2h-3=5h => 2h-SI —3h=3 > h (b)__Sum of the squares of the roots is equal to a given number. Find p, if the sum of the squares of the roots of the equation 4x2 + 3px-+ p2=0 is unity, EMP I & Bare the roots of 4x2 + 3px +p? =0, Bw then ort B= Since a+ f2=1 Given) (a+ B)-20B=1 @)Ga BF 9pt—Bp?=16 => p2=16 => paid(© Two roots differ by a given number. GEEDTED Fina f, if the roots of the equation x?— hx +10=0. differ by 3. EMD Let rand or 3 be the roots of x2 = hx + 10=0. Then @t+a—3= 2a-3=h > da=h+3 = a=AtS @ 10 and aar— 3) =10 or aa-3)=10 i) Putting value of orfrom equation (i) in equation (ii), we get CGH > CHC 203) W=49 > hatT (@) Roots satisfy a given relation (e.g. 20+ 5B = 7, where & Bare the roots of a given equation). (EEMTTED Find p, if the roots «, of the equation x2 — Sx + p=0, satisty therelation 204 5=7, QRIMALPI & Bare the roots of the equation x? - Sx +p = ‘Then 0 => h-9 = 40, thatis, Gi) and =p = af=p i) Since 2@+58=7 (Given) (ii) Put the value of B from equation (i) in equation (iii) 2a 5(5— a) =7 2a+2S-Sa=7 ot -3a=7-25, thatis “Ba=-18 > a=6 tiv) B=5-6=-1 Use () and Gv) Put the values of arand fin eq. (ii) 6) =p = p=6 (©) __ Both sum and product of the roots are equal to a given number. (GED Find m, if sum and product of the roots of the equation Sx°-+ (72m) x+3=0 is equal to a given number, say A.(QED Le A be the roots of the equation 5x24 (72m) x43=0 a+ po —P a 1=2m_2m=1 a and ofi=£=3 Lt atf=2 @) and faa Gi Then from () and (i) a+ f= af, thatis, m=7_3 eg SS 2m-7 SS". 0 ope ‘Without solving, find the sum and the product of the roots of the following quadratic ‘equations @ e-Sr+ Gil) pt—geer () Cem) x24 mtn)xtn— Find the value of k, if (sum of the roots of the equation 2kx? - 3x + 4k = 0 is twice the product of the roots. (i) Bee I-11 0 (iv) (a+b) axr+b=0 =0 (i) DA = Smr + 9n=0 Gi) sum of the roots of the equation x? + (Bk - 7) x + Sk=0 is 3 times the product of the roots, Find k, if (sum of the squares of the roots of the equation 4k? + 3kx = 8 =0 is 2, Gi) sum of the squares of the roots of the equation 22 2kx + Ok+ 1) =0is 6 Find p, if (i) the roots of the equation x2 - x + p? = 0 differ by unity. Gi). the roots of the equation x? + 3x +p —2= 0 differ by 2. Find m, if the roots of the equation x? - 7x + 3m 5 = 0 satisfy the relation 3+ 28=4 Gi) the roots of the equation x? + 7x + 3m—5 = 0 satisfy the relation 3a-2=4 (iii) the roots of the equation 3x2 ~ 2x + 7m + 2 = 0 satisfy the relation Tar 3A= 18 Find m, if sum and product of the roots of the following equations is equal to a given number A. ()—— @m+3)x? + (Im —5)x-+ Bm — 10) =0 Gi) 4x2 G + Smx-(9m— 17) =02.4 Symmetric functions of the roots of a quadratic equation. 2.4.1 Define symmetric functions of the roots of a quadratic equation Definition: Symmetric functions are those functions in which the roots involved are such that the value of the expressions involving them remain unaltered, when roots are interchanged. For example, if f(a, B) = o + B?, then FB = B+ P= + fh B+ =o +B) =f(a B) Find the value of a? + J}? + 308, if a= 2, B= 1. Also find the value of a + f° +3af if a= 1, B=2 OMEN When or= 2 and = 1, @ + B+ 30f= (2) + (1) +32) (1) 4146215 When a@= 1 and f= 2, @ + B+ 3af =(1) + (2) + 3(1) 2) 4846-15 ‘The expression o + 8° + 3af represents a symmetric function of oand &. 2.4.2. Evaluate a symmetric function of roots of a quadratic equation in terms of its co-efficients If @, Bare the roots of the quadratic equation. ax? +bx+¢=0, (@#0) @ ‘Then ort «i and of = Gi) ‘The functions given in equations (ii) and (iii) are the symmetric functions for the quadratic equation (i). ‘Some more symmetric functions of two variables o, fare given below: @ — @+ pr Gi) a + BS 11 a wy bed w Sef If a Bare the roots of the quadratic equation petgrtr=0 , (p40) then evaluate 28+ af? MMP Since a, Bare the roots of px? + gx + r= 0, therefore,@B+ of? = afla+ ph a2(_a\ ma lM-F If a, Bare the roots of the equation 2x? + 3x +4 =0, then 11 2 th find the value of @) 2+ 6 Ww Otg EMM Since o. fare the roots of the equation 2x24 3x +4 = 0, therefore, ai (ii) a) 3 Chge2 —— EXERCISE 1. If Bare the roots of the equation x2 + px + q = 0, then evaluate @ asp? Gi) aps af? cin Gre 2. If @ Bare the roots of the equation 4x2 — 5x +6 =0, then find the values of ot. +h Gi) op? 41,1 eB id pt op ware 3. Ife are the roots ofthe equation k?-+mx+n=0 (10), then find the values of @ A fr+ op Gi)2.5 Formation of a quadratic equation. If and Pare the roots of the required quadratic equation. Let rsa and x=f ie, . xn B= and (x) (X- B)=0 (at B)x+ af=0 which is the required quadratic equation in the standard form. 2.5.1 Find a quadratic equation from given roots and establish the formula 27 — (sum of the roots) x + product of the roots = 0. Let & Abe the roots of the quadratic equation + (@#0) @ axttbx+c=0 then a+f=-£ — and Rewriteeg. (as 42 x4 £=0 oe (AreSeo P= (at fyxt aB=0 or x2 ~(sum of roots) x + product of roots = 0, that is, x-Sx+P=0 where $= art Band P= of ‘Form a quadratic equation with roots 3 and 4. Since 3 and 4 are the roots of the required quadratic equation, therefore, jum of the roots=3 +4=7 P= Product of the roots = (3) (4) = 12 As 2-Sr+P=0, so the required quadratic equation is x2 7x + 12=0 2.5.2. Form quadratic equations whose roots are of the type 2 pe il 28 (@ 2a41, 2841 Gi) BG GH OM BEE Wat B, 4 +povhere @, Bare the roots of a given quadratic equation, If a Bare the roots of the equation 2x? - 3x — ‘having roots = 0, form quadeatic equations () 2@+1,28+1 Gi) B® cin B on fee @ arp4GEM As & Bare the roots of the equation 2x? 3x-5=0, 3 therefore, a+ 8) Zand oB=F S=Sum of the roots = 2a+1+2f+1 =2(a+p+2=2(5)+2=5 P = Product of the root @ a+ 1) (28+ 1) aps 2 (crt B)+1 =4(-$)+2G)+1 =-104+3+1=-6 Using x? - Sx + P=0, we have wo Sx- Gi) $= Sum of the roots = a? + ne P= Product of the roots = a? p =p) =(-3) Using x2 -Sx+P=0, we have Be Bao 3 42-2904 25=0 Gil) $= Sumof the roots =4 Ox8 cap) we 3 . =3 c: Using x2 -Sx+P=0, we have 3) 2 2-(-g)x+(-g]=0 > Sr+3x-2=0 5 = ao Bet BL 4 iv) S=Sumof the rots = 5+ f=" = lias 8) - 208) op [C9Using x? - Sr + P= 0, we have e-(B)rvis0 => 10x? + 29x + 10=0 Bro op (%) S=Sumof the roots = os Bae ge a+ pe septs 4% =10 P = Product ofthe roots = (r+ A). (5+ Using x2 - Sx-+ P=0, we have 9 eathee()-0 = 1029-920 IF o Bae the roots ofthe equation 42-78 +9 =, then form an equation whose roots are 2orand 2/. GEM since « # are the roots of the equation x? — 7x +9 =0, therefore, and The roots of the required equation are 2c, 28 S= Sum of roots = 2a+ 28= Aart B P = Product of roots = (20) (28) = 4a8'= 4(9) Thus the required quadratic equation will be 22 Sx+P=0, thatis, 22 1dr + 36=0——) EXE! 1, Write the quadratic equations having following roots. @ 45 o 49 © 23 @ 0,3 © 26 ® --7 @ ltil-i hy) 3+y2,3-12 2. Ife fare the roots of the equation x? ~ 3x + 6 = 0. Form equations whose roots are @) 2@41,26+1 be) BP © ak SI a @ Be © ahah 3. Ifa Bare the roots of the equation x4 px +q=0. Form equations whose roots are @ & pf ) 2.6 Synthetic Division Synthetic division is the process of finding the quotient and remainder, when a polynomial is divided by a linear polynomial. In fact synthetic division is simply a shortcut of long division method. 2.6.1 Describe the synthetic division method. ‘The method of synthetic division is described through the following example. Using synthetic division, divide the polynomial P(x) = 5x4 +x? - 3x by x- 2. (Gx! +23 -3x) = (@-2) From divisor, x- a, here a= 2 Now write the co-efficients of the dividend in a row with zero as the co-efficient of the missing powers of x in the descending order as shown below. Dividend P(x) = 5x4 + 1x28 +0 x28 - 3x 40x29 ‘Now write the co-efficients of x from dividend in a row and a= 2 on the left side, aB Ba (i) Write 5 the first co-efficient as it isin the row under the horizontal line. Gi) Multiply $ with 2 and write the result 10 under I. write the sum of I + 10 = 11 under the line (Gil) Multiply 11 with 2 and place the result 22 under 0. Add 0 and 22 and write the result 22 under the line,‘Multiply 22 with 2, place the result 44 under ~3. Write 41 as the sum of 44 and -3 ‘under the line. (v) Multiply 41 with 2 and put the result 82 under 0. The sum of 0 and 82 is 82. In the resulting row 82 separated by the vertical line segment is the remainder and 5, 11, 22, 41 are the co-efficients of the quotient. As the highest power of x in dividend is 4, therefore the highest power of x in ‘quotient will be 4—1=3 Thus Quotient = Q(x) = 5x3 + 1x2 + 22x + 41 and the Remainder = 2.6.2. Use synthetic division to (a) find quotient and remainder, when a given polynomial is divided by a linear polynomial. Using synthetic division, divide P(x) =x4=32 +15. by x41 (t=? + 15) #1) As xt1=x-(l),soa=-1 Now write the co-efficients of dividend in a row and a = —1 on the left side. Quotient = Q(x) = 33 x2 +0.x+0=9—x2 and Remainder = 15 (b) find the value (s) of unknown (s), ifthe zeros of a polynomial are given. ‘Using synthetic division, find the value of h. If the zero of polynomial PO) = 3x2 +4x~Th is 1 P(x) = 3x2 + 4x — Th and its zero is 1 Then by synthetic division, Remainder =7- 7h Since 1 is the zero of the polynomial, therefore, Remainder = 0, that is, 7-Th=0 T=Th => h=1 ©) find the value (s) of unknown (s), ifthe factors of a polynomial are given. Using synthetic division, find the values of J and m, if x 1 and x +1 are the factors of the polynomial P(x) =x? + 3h? + mx—-1 MMT Since x 1 and x + | are the factors of P(x) = x3 + 3x2 + mx - 1 therefore, 1 and—1 are zeros of polynomial P(x).Now by synthetic division 1 31 m - 1 o 1 3141 Stems 1 Bel lemti | 3ltm Since 1 is the zero of polynomial, therefore remainder is zero, that is, 314m=0 @ and 1 31 m “1 x1 4 =I =3+1 3l=m=1 1 31-1 -31+m+1 | 31-m=2 Since 1 is the zero of polynomial, therefore, remainder is zero, that is, 31-m-2=0 Gi) Adding eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 61-2=0 6l=2 => gu Put the value of /in eq. () (f)+m=0 or 1+m=0 => m=-1 Thus 1 ; and m=—I (@) solve a cubic equation, if one root of the equation is given. EEN Using synthetic division, solve the equation 3x° - 11x? + 5x+3=0 when 3 is the root of the equation. QWMMDsince 3 is the root of the equation 323 — 1x2 + 5x+3=0. ‘Then by synthetic division, we get ‘The depressed equation is 3x2—2x-1=0 3u8-3x+x-1=0 3xx- 1) + 10-1) =0 (-DGr+=0 Either x-1=0 or 3x+1=0, thatis,-1 > xs- 1 . Hence 3, | and ~7 are the roots of the given equation. (©) solve a biquadratic (quartic) equation, if two of the real roots of the equation are given. CEDTTTD By synthetic division, solve the equation xt ~ 49x? + 36x + 252 = O having roots ~2 and 6. GVMTDSince 2 and 6 are the roots of the given equation x! — 49x? + 36x + 252 =0. ‘Then by synthetic division, we get 419 4 45 6 6 24 1 4 21 The depressed equation is? 44x21 =0 4 Tx-3x-21=0 w+ N34 =0 +D-H=0 Either x#7=0 or x-3 x Thus 2, 6, ~7 and 3 are the roots of the given equation. or x = RCISE 2.6 g— 1 Use synthetic division to find the quotient and the remainder, when. @ O24 Ix- D+ e+ 1 (ii) (4x3 — Sx + 15) +(x +3) Gil) G8 +x? - 3x 42)+(-2) 2 Find the value of h using synthetic division, if (@ 3 isthe zeto of the polynomial 2x3 — 3hx? +9 Gi) Lis the zero of the polynomial x? - 2hx? + 11 Gi) 1 is the zero of the polynomial 2x° + Shx ~ 23 3. Use synthetic division to find the values of J and m, if @ — (x+3) and (x— 2) are the factors of the polynomial 28 44x + Dem (i) (r= 1) and (x +1) are the factors of the polynomial 8-32 + Ime + 6Solve by using synthetic division, if (2s the root of the equation x3 - 28x + 48 = 0 i) 3 is the root of the equation 2x3 — 3x2 — 11x + (ii) 1 is the root of the equation 4x} — x*- 11x— 5. Solve by using synthetic division, if (@ Land 3 are the roots of the equation x 102 +9=0 Gi) 3 and—4 are the roots of the equation x4 + 2x? — 13x - 14x +24=0 2.7 Simultaneous equations A system of equations having a common solution is called a system of simultaneous ‘equations. The set of all the ordered pairs (x, y), which satisfies the system of equations is called the solution set of the system. 2.7(i) Solve a system of two equations in two variables, (@) when one equation is linear and the other is quadratic. To solve a system of equations in two variables x and y. Find ‘y’ in terms of x from the given linear equation. Substitute the value of y in the quadratic equation, we get an other ‘quadratic equation in one variable x. Solve this equation for x and then find the values of y. ‘The values of x and y provide the solution set of the system of equations. EREDED soe the system of equations Betys4 and 32 4y2=52, EMM Me given equations are Brtya4 @ and 3x24 y?=52. Gi) Fromeq. (i) y=4—3x (ii) Pat value of y in ¢q, (i) 3x24 4-34)? = 52 3x2 + 16-2444 9x2 -52=0 122 -24x-36=0 or x2-2x-3=0 By factorization = 3rtx-3=0 x(-3)+10-3)=0 > 3 +)=0 Either x-3 x23 or Put the values of xin eq, (ii) When x=3 =0ya4-3x y=4-3@)=4-9 yes ©. The ordered pairs are (3, ~5) and (-1,7) ‘Thus, the solution set is {(3,-5), C1, 7)} (6) when both the equations are quadratic. ‘The method to solve the equations is illustrated through the following examples. Solve the equations Pe yte2x=8 and (x- 1+ (y+ 1 =8 1¢ given equations are aye 2e=8 w (x= 1? ++ D2=8 Gi) From equation (ii), we get at Ltye+ 24158 or yt 2k +226 ii) Subtracting eq, (ii) from eq. (i), we have 4x-2y=2 or 2v-y=1 2-1 (iv) Put the value of y in eq. (ii) (x= 124 Qe- 14 DP=8 2-2 + 1442-820 Sx2-2x-7=0 Se -7e45x-7=0 or xSx-7) +1 Sx-7) > Gx-De+l Either 5x-7=0 or x + 1.=0,, thats, setosle a 1 ‘Now putting the values of x in eq. (iv), we haveEDD Seve the equations 4y=7 and 22+ 3y?= 18, (EMD Given equations are xtyteT 2x2 + 3y2= 18 ‘Multiply equation (i) with 3 3x2 +3)? = 21 Subtracting equations (ii) from (iii) w=3 => x=t¥3 When x=-/3, then from equation @) S4yeT or 34227 = ytad = yt? When x=-1/3, then y=+2 Thus, the required solution set is { (4-3. +2)} Solve the equations 2? + y= 20 and 6x? + xy—y" Given equations are e+y=20 @ 6x? +.xy- The equation (ii) can be written as We have y= Substituting y= 3x in the equation (i), we wa 2? + Bx =20 or x? 49x? = 20 = 1r=20 > P=2 > x=ty When x=9/2, y=3 ()2) = 32 and when x =—~J2, Substituting ~2x in the equation (i), we have 20 or 44e ‘Thus, the solution is { (2, 32), (4/2, 2), (2,4), 2, 4)}wo 3x? — Dry—y? = 80 Gi) ‘Multiplying equation (i) by 2, we have 2x? + 2y? = 80 (iii) ‘Subtracting the equation (iii) from equation (ii), we get Day 3y=0 oy ‘The equation (iv) can be written as at Bry tay-dyte or x 3y) ty (e-3y)=0 > &-H)@+y)=0 Either x-3y=0 or = x+y =0 =3y or x Putin eq. (i), Gy)? +? = 40 (oy +y? = 40 10y? = 40 2? =40 ysd y= 20 yt? yot2V5 yao ye yas ya-2y¥5 x=3y y xey sey x= 3(2) (-2) x=- (245) x=-(-2J5) x=6 x=-6 xs-2\8 22.5 The solution setis {(6, 2), (-6, 2), (2-V5,-2-V5), (-2-V5, 2-V5)}=—)) EXERCISE 2.7 == Solve the following simultancous equations. 1 xty=5 ; a2 2y- 14 2 3x-2y=1 : 3.0 x-ys7 7 xty=a-b 4. 5 #aQ-Nt=10 6 @FHDP+OFDESS ; 1 8. 9 5 3x2 — Sry - 12)? =0 ytays3 2.7(ii) Solving Real Life Problems with Quadratic Equations ‘There are many problems which lead to quadratic equations. To form an equation, we use symbols for unknown quantities in the problems. Then roots of the equation may provide the answer to these problems, The procedure to solve these problems is explained in the following examples, ‘Three less than a certain number multiplied by 9 less than twice the number is 104. Find the number. Let the required number be x. Then three less than the number = x—3 and 9 less than twice the number = 2x — 9 According to the given condition, we have (x= 3) (2x9) = 104 2x2 — 15x +27 = 104 2x? 15x-77=0 Factorizing, we get Qx+7) (e-11) = and 11 are the requited numbers, The length of a rectangle is 4cm more than its breadth. If the area of the rectangle is 45cm2, Find its sides.‘Then the length in cm will be x +4. By the given condition rectangular area = 45cm’, that is, x(r44)=45 w+ 4x-45=0 +9 (x-5)=0 x9 or x-5=0 9 or xaS Ifx=5,thenx+4=5+4=9 (neglecting -ve value) ‘Thus the breadth is Sem and length is 9em, ‘The sum of the co-ordinates of a point is 6 and the sum of their squares is 20. Find the co-ordinates of the point. Let (x, y) be the co-ordinates of the point. Then by the given conditions, we have xty=6 0 2 +y2=20 Gi) Fromeq.() y=6-x Gi) Putting y = 6 —x in eq, (i), we get 2246-2) =20 22436422 - 12x-20=0 22 12x+16=0 or 2-6r+8=0 Factorizing, we get (e-4)(e-2)=0 > v=4 or x=2 using eq. (ii), y=6-4=2 or y 4 the co-ordinates of the point are (4, 2) or (2, 4) ="). 9 oP RS 1, The product of two positive consecutive numbers is 182. Find the numbers, ‘The sum of the squares of three positive consecutive numbers is 77. Find them, 3. The sum of five times a number and the square of the number is 204. Find the number. ‘The product of five less than three times a certain number and one less than four times the number is 7. Find the number. 5. The difference of a number and its reciprocal is, a Find the number. 6. The sum of the squares of two digits of a positive integral number is 65 and the number is 9 times the sum of its digits. Find the number.@ ai) Gi) ww) w) wi) iy (viii) (ix) ‘The sum of the co-ordinates of a point is 9 and sum of their squares is 45, Find the co-ordinates of the point. Find two integers whose sum is 9 and the difference of their squares is also 9. Find two integers whose difference is 4 and whose squares differ by 72. Find the dimensions of a rectangle, whose perimeter is 80cm and its area is 375em®. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE - 2 Multiple Choice Questions Four possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (7) the correct, answer. If a, Bate the roots of 3x° + 5x-2=0, then a+ Bis 5 3 =5 @ 5 oF © Fz @ Uf a Bare the roots of 7x? —x+4=0, then apis a 4 7 @ > ) 5 © gq @ Roots of the equation 4x? - Sx +2 =0 are (a) irrational (b)_ imaginary (c)_ rational (d) none of these Cube roots of -1 are (@ -1,-0,-07 (b) -1.0,-0 © -1,-0.0? @) 1-0, -w Sum of the cube roots of unity is @ 0 1 © 4 @ 3 Product of cube roots of unity is @ 0 om oa @ 3 If? ~ dac <0, then the rots of ax? + bx += 0 are @) irrational (b) rational (©) imaginary (@) _none of these If? ~ dac> 0, but not a perfect square then roots of ax? + bx + c= O are (@) imaginary (b) rational (@) irrational (@)_—_none of these ie a8 equal to 1 @ |(xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) (xy) a) (iil) (iv) ) (vi) (vii) (viii) fix) &® (xi) + is equal to @ @p ©) oH © (a+ pP-206 @ ap Two square roots of unity are @ 1-1 ®) Lo © Lo @ oo Roots of the equation 4x2 — 4x + 1 =0 are (a) real, equal (b) real, unequal (c) imaginary (4) _ixtational If a, Bare the roots of px? + gx + r= 0, then sum of the roots 2orand 2Bis <4 z a4 a OF > OF @ -% If a Bare the soots of x2 x— 1 = 0, then product of the roots 2erand 2fis @ 2 &) 2 © 4 @ -4 The nature of the roots of equation ax? + bx + ¢ = 0 is determined by (@) sum of the roots (b) product of the roots (©) synthetic division (d) discriminant The discriminant of ax? + bx + c= is (a) B-dac — (b) BP +dac (©) B+ 4ac (@) ~ BP- dae Write short answers of the following questions. Discuss the nature of the roots of the following equations (@) P43x45=0 (ob) 20? - 7x43 (©) 2+6x-1=0 (@ 162—8r+1=0 Find o? it = =eN=3 2 Prove that the sum of the all cube roots of unity is zero. Find the product of complex cube roots of unity Show thax} +y* = (+) (x + ay) (+0) Evaluate o°7 + @* +1 Evaluate (1 — @ + 0) Ife is cube root of unity, form an equation whose roots are 30 and 30” Using synthetic division, find the remainder and quotient when (x! + 3x?-+ 2) + (x 2) Using synthetic division, show that x ~ 2 is the factor of x3 4x2 —7x-+ 2. Find the sum and product of the roots of the equation 2px? + 3gx ~ 4r = 0 14 Find 7g + 2 of the roots ofthe equation x? — 4x +3=0vy vv If @, Bare the roots of 4x” - 3x + 6 = 0, find @ @e & Ge @ ap If of Bare the roots of x2 — Sx +7 =0, find an equation whose roots are fa) -a-B b) 2a, 26. Fill in the blanks ‘The discriminant of ax? + bx +c = Ois . If b? — 4ac = 0, then roots of ax? + bx + are, If b? — 4ac > 0, then the roots of ax? + bx + ¢ = 0 are If b? — 4ac < 0, then the root of ax? + bx += 0 are If 2 — 4ac > 0 and perfect square, then the roots of ax? + bx+c=Oare_ If b* — 4ac > 0 and not a perfect square, then roots of ax? + bx + ¢= If of Bare the roots of ax2 + bx +e If a, Bare the roots of ax? + bx +0 If @ Bare the roots of 7x? - Sx+3 If @, Bare the roots of $x? + 3x-9 0, then sum of the roots is 0, then product of the roots is 0, then the sum of the roots is 0, then product of the roots is For a quadratic equation ax? + bx + ¢ Cube roots of unity are Under usual notation sum of the cube roots of unity is IF 1, © are the cube roots of unity, then (0°? is equal to If of are the roots of the quadratic equation, then the quadratic equation is written as If 20 and 20? are the roots of an equation, then equation is k= Discriminant of the quadratic expression ax? + bx + ¢ is “b? — 4ac’”. a5 -1-\E ates and peney Complex cube roots of unity are @ and Properties of cube roots of unity. () The product of three cube roots of unity is one. Le., (1) (@) (0) (6) Each of the complex cube roots of unity is reciprocal of the other. (©) Each of the complex cube roots of unity is the square of the other. (d) The sum of all the cube roots of unity is zero, /e., 140+ 0*=0 The cube roots of unity are 1,‘The sum and the product of the roots of ax? + bx + ¢=0,a#0 are b a+B > — Symmetric functions of the roots of a quadratic equation are those functions in which the roots involved are such that the values of the expressions remain unaltered, when roots are interchanged, > Formation of a quadratic equation if its roots are given; 2 — (sum of the roots) x + product of the roots = 0 => xt-(a+B)x+ af=0. > Synthetic division is the process of finding the quotient and remainder, when a polynomial is divided by a linear polynomial. > A system of equations having a common solution is called a system of simultaneous equations, and aff = © respectively.—_— ee SSS pe eee [Se SSS |e ee. ee ae eee a In this unit, students will learn how to 28 define ratio, proportions and variations (direct and inverse). 2s find 3", 4", mean and continued proportion. 2 apply theorems of invertendo, alternendo, componendo, dividendo and componendo & dividendo to find proportions. & define joint variation. & solve problems related to joint variation. & use k-method to prove conditional equalities involving proportions. & solve real life problems based on variations. 8)3.1 Ratio, Proportions and Variations 3.1(i) Define (a) ratio, (6) proportion and (c) variations (direct and inverse). (a) Ratio A relation between two quantities of the same kind (measured in same unit) is called ratio. If a and b are two quantities of the same kind and b is not zero, then the ratio of a and bis written as a : b or in fraction 5 8, if a hockey team wins 4 games and loses 5, then the ratio of the games won to games lostis 4:5 orin fraction S Remember that: (® The order of the elements in a ratio is important. (i) In ratio a: b, the first term a is called antecedent and the second term b is called consequent A ratio has no units CTD Find the ratio of (i) 200gm to 700 gm Gi Tkm to 600m NMP) Ratio of 200gm to 700 gm 200_2 200 : 700 = 599 = 5 =2: Where 2 : 7 is the simplest (Lowest) form of the ratio 200 : 700, (i) Ratio of tkm to 600m Since 1km= 1000m_ or Tkm: 600m = 1000:600 1000 | 600 _ 9.6 00? 100 = 10:6=5:3 (EEDTED Find a, if the ratios a+ 3: 7+ a and 4: 5 are equal QAM Since the ratios a +3: 7-+a and 4: 5 are equal. in fraction formFRETTTEED tr 2 is added in each number of the ratio 3 : 4, we get a new ratio 5 : 6. Find the ‘numbers GAIMMD Because the ratio of two numbers is 3: 4. ‘Multiply cach number of the ratio with x. Then the numbers be 3x, 4x and the ratio becomes 3x:4x. Now according to the given condition 3xt2_5 ax 6(3x +2) =S(4e +2) > 18+ 12=20r+ 10 18x-20r=10-12 > -2v=-2 > x=1 ‘Thus the required numbers are 3x=3(1)=3 and 4x=4(1) =4. ETE Find the ratio 3a + 4b : Sa + Thifa:b=5:8, aT = a_5 SEMIN Given that a: b=5:8 or 5=§ 3a+4b Now 3a44b:Sa+7b=37 575 st Boal a+ 7b = -(a\.,/(b) (Dividing numerator and denominator by b) m5 s(5)+7(5) 2G ( “sQ)+10) *) cis 15,4 15432 28 25 = 5456 “BI gt7 8 Hence, 3a44b:5a+7b=47:81 (b) Proportion A proportion is a statement, which is expressed as an equivalence of two ratios. If two ratios a : b and ¢ : d are equal, then we can write @: b= 0: d Where quantities a, d are called extremes, while b, ¢ are called means. Symbolically the proportion of a, b, ¢ and d is written as, a:bne:d rbse:dor ois gals je, ad= This shows that, Product of extremes = Product of means. Find x, if 60m : 90m :: 20kg : x kg Given that 60m : 90m :: 20kg : x kg 60: 90=20: x 30 ie, xis 30 kg EDITED Find the cost of 15kg of sugar, if 7 kg of sugar costs 560 rupees. Let the cost of 15kg of sugar be x-rupees. Then in proportion form 15kg : Tkg :: Rs..x: Rs, 560 15:7 =x: 560 Product of extremes = Product of means 15 x 560 = 7x Tx = 15 x 560 = 152560 5) 1200 Thus, x =Rs. 1200. Seat —— 1, Express the following as a ratio a : b and as a fraction in its simplest (lowest) form. @ Rs. 750, Rs. 1250 (i) 450em, 3m Git) 4kg, 2kg 750gm () 27min, 30 sec, 1 hour @) 75°, 225° 2, In a class of 60 students, 25 students are girls and remaining students are boys. Compute the ratio of (boys to total students (i) boys to girls 3. If3(4x— Sy) = 2x—7y, find the ratio: y. Find the value of p, if the ratios 2p + 5 : 3p +4 and 3 :4 are equal If the ratios 3x-+ 1: 6+ 4x and 2: 5 are equal. Find the value of x.‘Two numbers are in the ratio 5: 8. If 9 is added to each number, we get a new ratio 8: 11. Find the numbers. 7. If 10 is added in each number of the ratio 4 -13, we get anew ratio 1 : 2. ‘What are the numbers? 8. Find the cost of 8kg of mangoes, if Skg of mangoes cost Rs. 250. 9, Ia: b=7:6, find the value of 3a + 5b: 7b - Sa. 10. Complete the following: @ 98-5 then de= Sa_15b (i) =F then ay = (id) we BP then Sy = 11, Find x in the following proportions. () Bx-2:4::2e4327 wi xo35 xe1 4 mea |) id) ) 0 Sax: Mx 16-3: 25-4 (©) Variation: ‘The word variation is frequently used in all sciences, There are two types of variations: (i) Direct variation Gi) Inverse variation, () Direct Variation If two quantities are related in such a way that increase (decrease) in one quantity ‘causes increase (decrease) in the other quantity, then this variation is called direct variation. In otherwords, if a quantity y varies directly with regard to a quantity x. We say that y ke. ie, 2= hk. is directly proportional to x and is written as y s x or ‘The sign « read as “varies as” is called the sign of proportionality or variation, while 40s known as constant of variation. eg, (Faster the speed of a car, longer the distance it covers (i) ‘The smaller the radius of the circle, smaller the circumference is Find the relation between distance d of a body falling from rest varies directly as the square of the time 1, neglecting air resistance. Find k, if d = 16 feet for r= 1 sec. Also derive a relation between d and t. Since dis the distance of the body falling from rest in time 1 ‘Then under the given condition daeSince d= 16 feet and r= | sec ‘Then equation (i) becomes 16=k (1)? ie, k=16 putineg.@) d= 16F Which is a relationship between the distance d and time t. Activity: From the above example: @ Find time 1, when d = 64 feet (i_Find distance d, when t= 3 sec If y varies directly as x, find (a) the equation connecting x and y. (b) the constant of variation k and the relation between x and y, whenx=7 and (€) the value of y, when x= 21 (a) Given that y varies directly as x. Therefore y= x,ie, y=kx, where kis constant of variation in equation @ 6 Weget 6=7k => k= Putin eg. () y= 4x @) (©) Now put x = 21, in equation (ii) Then y Sen-1s 782 Given that A varies directly asthe square of rand A=" cm?, when r= 9em, Ifr= 14cm, then find A Since A varies directly as square of r 2 Aw or A=kr @ 1182 _ 1 @Put and r =14em in eq. (i) A=? ge =72xc14% 14 = 616 em? If y varies directly as cube of x and y= 81 when. ee that y varies directly as cube of x. ie, yew or y=ks (@ (where kis constant) Puty=81 and x=3in (i) 81=kG)) = 2k=81 > k=3 Now put k=3 and x= 5 in eq. (i) Loa = 3, so evaluate y when x= 5. (ii) Tnverse Variation If two quantities are related in such a way that when one quantity increases, the other decreases is called inverse variation, In otherwords, if 2 quantity y varies inversely with regard to quantity x. We say that y k i 1 is inversely proportional tox or y vaties inversely as x and is written as y = ot y= , where k #0 is the constant of variation. a [Ep If y varies inversely as x and y = 8, when x=4, Find y, when x= 16. SEED Since y varies inversely as x, therefore yet or @ > ey) Putting y = 8 and x in (ii) k=0)0) =@)G)=32 Now put k= 32 and x= 16 in (i) => ye 16, when x=, so find x, when y = 100, fy varies inversely as x? and y = 16, ‘Since y varies inversely as x2, therefore @ Now put k= 400 and y = 100 in (i)fy varies directly as x, and y (@ yin terms of x (ii) xwhen y=28 2 If y x, and y=7 when x =3 find @ yim terms of x (x when y=35 and y when x= 18 3 If R « T and R = 5 when T = 8, find the equation connecting R and T. Also find R when T = 64 and T when R = 20. 4. IfRe TP and R=8 when T= 3, find R when T=6. 5, Tf Vex R8 and when R = 3, find R when V = 625. 6. If w varies directly as w* and w = 81 when Find w when u = 5, 7. 8. Ify varies inversely as x and y = 7 when x= 2, find y when x = 126. Iya tand y =4 when x= 3, find x when y =24 9. Iweebandw=5 when 2=7, find w when 2 = "4° 10. Awband A=2.when r=3, find r when A =72. 11, aeefyand a=3 when b= 4, find a when b= 8, 12, Vehand V=5 when r=3, find Vwhen r= 6 and r when V= 320 1 13. moc 23 and m=2 when n=4, find m when n = 6 and n when m= 432, 3.1(ii) Find 3", 4", mean and continued proportion: We are already familiar with proportions that if quantities a, b, c and d are in proportion, then a:b:0:d ie, product of extremes = product of means Third Proportional Ifthree quantities a, b and c are related as a: b:: bc, then c is called the third proportion. (GEEDV TED Find a third proportional of x + y and x? — y2. Let che the third proportional, then xty:@-y2ax—ytre erty) = 02-99) (2 -y9)9G?) _ OH) a-y ety) x+y (ty) €= (2-99) e-y) = (x+y) YP Fourth Proportional If four quantities a, 6, ¢ and d are related as aibse:d ‘Then dis called the fourth proportional. (EATED Find fourth proportional of a? - 63, a+ b and a? + ab +B? QED Let x be the fourth proportional, then (a6): (a+) (2+ ab +0) :x ie, x (a—b')= (a+b) (a? + ab +b?) (a+b) (@+ab+b2) (a+) (a? + ab +b%) a-b = (a= 6) (a? + ab +B) © ‘Mean Proportional If three quantities a, b and c are related as a:b :: b= c, then b is called the mean proportional. (GREENTED Find the mean proportional of 9p%q! and r*. QED Let m be the mean proportional, then 9p%q4: ms: m8 or om. m= 9pSq4 (r8) m= 9p%qtrs mat 9pige = + 3piert Continued Proportion I three quantities a, b and c are related as a:bubre , ‘where a is first, b is the mean and c is the third proportional, then a, b and ¢ are in continued proportion. (SEMTILED Find p, if 12, p and 3 are in continued proportion. QEMMED since 12, p and 3 are in continued proportion. I2:p=p:3 ie, p-p=(12)G) => pr=36 Thus, p=+6a 302 i) @-Ba-b () — &-yPe-y Bag _p-q Peg’ P- pate ©) ety taay 2? o) 2. Find a fourth proportional to @ 5,815 (i) 4x4, 208, 18x it) 150568, 10429, 210°? (oy) = Le +24, = 3), 5x4 4008 ©) +e PP ppg P 0) PPO PIE DP) P +E P—@ 3. Find a mean proportional between @ 20, 45, (ii) 20x3y9, Sx?y Git) 1Sp4gr3, 135q5r7 fe) e-y, D 4. Find the values of the letter involved in the following continued proportions. @ ‘S,p.45 (ii) 8x, 18 (ii) 12, 3p -6,27 (iv) 7,m=3,28 3.2 Theorems on Proportions If four quantities a, b, ¢ and d form a proportion, then many other useful properties may be deduced by the properties of fractions. (1) Theorem of Invertendo Ita: b=c:d,thenb:a=d:e (SENT ICED If 3m : 2n =p : 2g, then 2n:3m=2q:p GETIND since 3m: 2n =p: 29 : 3m_p 2n ~ 2g By invertendo theorem 2n 2g 3m p ie, 2n:3m=2g:p Q) Theorem of Alternando Ifa:b=c:d,thena:c=b:d EDT 3p 1: 2g = 5r: 7s, then prove that 3p + 1: Sr= 2g 27s GEMM Given that 3p + 1: 2g = Sr: 7s2g “7s By alternando theorem 3p+1_2¢ Sr 77s Thus, 3p+1:Sr=2g:7s @) Theorem of Componendo Mea:bse:d,then @ — atb:b=c+d-d and (i) asatb=eretd RET mn +3 sn =p: q-2, then mtns3 +q-2:q-2 SEM sons n=piq-2 m+3__p mn ~g-2 By componendo theorem (m+3)+n_p+(q-2 no q-2 m+n+3_ptg-2 ™ g-2 Thus m+n+3:n=p+q-2:q-2 (4) Theorem of Dividendo If a:b=e:d,then @ a-b:b=c-d:d Wi) a:a-b=c:0e-d Gams. n-2=2p43:3g41, Then m-n+3:n-2 —3g+2:3q+h BMD civen that m:n 22 2p 43: 3941 m+1_2p4+3 ‘Then n-2~3q41 By dividendo theorem m _2p= 342 n-2 > 3g+l Thus m—n+3:n-2=2p-3q42:3q+1 ‘Theorem of Componendo-dividendoThus SEND rm n= ‘Then prove that 3m +n: 3m—7n = 3p +7q : 3p -7q AMM since min=pig Maliplying both sides by >. we get 3m_» In 7g ‘Then using componendo-dividendo theorem 3m+In_3p+7q 3m ip —7q 3m-47n:3m— n= 3p +74: 3p—79 (SEMIN Sm + 3: Sm—3n = Sp +3q : Sp - 3g, then show that_m:n=p:q Given that Sm-+3n: 5m—3n=Sp +3q:Sp—3q By componendo-dividendo theorem (Sm +3n) + (Sm—3n) _(Sp + 3g) + (5p ~ 34) (Sm + 3n)—(Sm—3n) ~ (Sp +3q)— (Sp — 34) Sm+3n+5m=3n_Sp+3q+Sp—3q Sm 3n—Sm+3n Sp+3q—Sp+3q 10m _10p, 6n > 6q Multiplying both sides by $ mp nog m:n=p:q (CGREETTEED Using theorem of componendo-dividendo, find the value of m+3p m+29 Sq Sptmaag m—MMMM since m= 5, OF me eg @ By componendo-dividendo theorem m+3p_2g+p+g)_2g+ptq m—3p—2q-(p+q)24-p-4 m+3p_p+3q m-3p" q-p Again from eq. (), we have me. 2q>pr4 By componendo-dividendo theorem m+2q_3p+p+g)_3p+ptq m—2q~3p-(p+q) 3p-P—4 m+2q_dp+q m-2q~2p-q ‘Adding (ii) and (ii) mi3p mt2g_ abate ote p+3q, dpa m—3p* m-2q~ 2p-q-” p-q” wP-|q +34) Op-g)+(p~ 4) Gp +a) (-4) 2p-9) 2p? = Spy + 3q? + 4p*=3pq— a (@-a@p-9@) 2p? 8pq +242 _ 2p? 4pq +g") ~(p-D2p-g P-4g)2p-9) GENTTED Using theorem of commnnentoiende solve the equation Vee3 +yr=3 Ve3-\k-3 3 wi ii) mm «. tion is eS eve=3_4 GEUTITED civen equation is YES NESS = By componendo-dividendo theorem ea3 + ye—3 +e 3-3x+3=49(x-3) > x+3=49x- 147 => x-49x=-147-3 150 48 —48x=-150 = 48x=150 = x= Ge+32-G-5P 4 5 ‘Using componendo-dividendo theorem, solve the equation (“335 (P= Solution Get 3h == SP 4 SLND Given equations EEF G5)“ By componendo-dividendo theorem (et 3) = (r= 5)? + 4 3) He? (+3) 5)? 3-5) 2x43)? _ 9 20=5P 1 Taking square root or The solution set is (3, 9) —— EXERC 1. Provethat_ = a:b=e:d,if dat Sb _4e+5d 2a+9b 2c+9d © Ga=5b~ c= 5d () Ya=9b~ 2=9d atebP 4d a@e4bed adap Gt) P= bP Od a ee () pat gb: pa qb=pe+ qd: pe-gd atbtced a-bt+e-djy 24#3b+2043d 2a 3b420—3d (i) a4 36-20 3d~ 2a~3b-2e+3d 2. Using theorem of componendo-dividendo xedy xed xa2ytx-22' BP yar (Find the value of (i) Find the value of "> i x= 6a_x46b _ lab Gi) Find the value of Tgq—"— gp «if «=p xo3y_a+3 _ 3x Gy) Find the value of [35 —Toae > if x= 75 So3p s43q 4, Opa () Find the value of 3p +539 > ifs =7 00 (-2? ye 12 i) Sove Cie grains (vii) Solve (vill) Solve E82 Ve =o Verspeye—p 3 (e+5P-G-3) 13, (et5P+@-3p 14 3.3.4) Joint variation A combination of direct and inverse variations of one or more than one variables, forms joint variation Iva variable y varies directly as x and varies inversely as z Then yar and yo! (ix) Solve. In joint variation, we write it as yey x ie, yaks Where k# 0 is the constant of variation,For example, by Newton’s law of gravitation, if one body attracts another with a force (G), that varies directly as the product of their masses (m,), (m,) and inversely as the square of the distance (d) between them. m ie, Gx or G=k TAT where ks the constant 334i) Problems related to joint variation. Procedure to solve the problems related to joint variation is explained through examples. Iy varies jointly as x? and z and y= 6 when x = 4,2=9. Write y ae a function ‘of x and z and determine the value of y, when x=—8 and z= 12. Since y varies jointly as x? and z, therefore yeexte ie, yekee @ Pu y=6,x=4,2=9 KAP) 6 1 Texan = k=39 Purk=gzin eq), y=pys%2 Now put x=-8, 2= 12 in the above equation, yeoman p vaties jointly as q and 72 and inversely as s and #, p = 40, when = 3, 1= 2, Find p in terms of qr and 1. Also find the value of p when q =~2,r and e HMM Given thar pa ae nO) Put = p=40,q=8,r=5,s=3andr=2 =, BOGE 40=k 307 40x3 x 8x25 BR S ‘Then eq. (i) becomes 12 gr POS stNow for g=~2, r=4, s=3 and 1=—1, we have 12 24" 128, P= My Ss SS" TOE 1 If-s varies directly as u? and inversely as v and s = 7 when u = 3, v = 2. Find the value. of s when « and v = 10. 2. If'w varies jointly as x, y? and z and w = 5 when x = 2, y= 3, z= 10. Find w when x=4,y=Tand 2=3. 3, If y varies directly as x° and inversely as 2? and 1, and y = 16 when 1= 3, Find the value of y when x= 2, 2=3 and r= 4. 4, fu varies drety a x and inversely asthe product ye, and w= 2 when x=8,y=7, z=2. Find the value of u when x= 5. I'v varies directly as the product xy* and inversely as bedef kbsd+p beds} LHS. =RHS. @h+Cd+ef atcre abe + cb + ef be def LHS. = =k RHS. Thus, 1. a:b=e:4,(a,b,c,d#0), then show that 4a-9b 4e-9d 6a-Sb_60~Sd Oar 9e=tex9d = Gan Sb=6e4 5d z ai) 5=\/are Gv) ah e8: B+ =abed: bid () pad) gb: ple +d) + qdact ce+ea @ bargep ii) 3.4(ii) Real life problems based on variation ‘The strength “s” of a rectangular beam varies directly as the breadth b and the square of the depth d. If 2 beam 9cm wide and 12cm deep will support 1200 1b. What weight beam of 12cm wide and 9em deep will support? GET By the joint variation, we haves « bd? ie, $= kb @ Put = 1200, b=9 and d= 12 (9) (12)? = 1200, x —1200__ 25 9x 144" 27 25, Putin eg. i) s= 5p bd? Now for b = 12 andd=9 25 25(12) (9) (9) 3 aa op - MLB) soo EEDIIED The current in a wire varies directly as the electromotive force E and inversely 2 the resistance R. I J = 32 amperes, when E = 128 volts and R = 8 ohms. Find J, when B= 150 volts and R = 18 ohms, E EON ts joint vation, wehave 14, ie. For 1=32, E= 128 and R= 8, @ (128) _ 32x8 3220 Ap tk > ka? Putineg. @) = Now for £= 150 and R= 18 2150) _ 50 =o sy amp.SS" 9 Sok RPS The surface area A of a cube varies directly as the square of the length / of an edge and A = 27 square units when / = 3 units. Find () A when = 4 units (i) when A = 12 sq, units The surface area S of the sphere varies directly as the square of radius r, ‘S=16when r = 2. Find r when S = 36. In Hook’s law the force F applied to stretch a spring varies directly as the amount of elongation Sand F = 32ib when S = 1.6 in. Find (i) S when F = 50 Ib (ii) F when S=0.8in. The intensity J of light from a given source varies inversely as the square of the distance d from it. If the intensity is 20 candlepower at a distance of 12f1. from the source, find the intensity at a point 8ft. from the source. The pressure P in a body of fluid varies directly as the depth d. If the pressure exerted on the bottom of a tank by a column of fluid Sft. high is 2.25 Ib/sq. in, how deep must the fluid be to exert a pressure of 9 Ib/sq. in? Labour costs ¢ varies jointly as the number of workers n and the average number of days d. If the cost of 800 workers for 13 days is Rs. 286000, then find the labour cost of 600 workers for 18 days. The supporting load c of a pillar varies as the fourth power of its diameter d and inversely as the square of its length /. A pillar of diameter 6 inch and of height 30 feet will support a load of 63 tons. How high a 4 inch pillar must be to support a load of 28 tons? The time T required for an elevator to lift a weight varies jointly as the weight w and the lifting depth d varies inversely as the power p of the motor. If 25 sec. are required for a 4hp motor to lift 500 Ib through 40 ft, what power is required to lift 800 Ib, through 120 ft in 40 sec.? ‘The kinetic energy (K.E.) of a body varies jointly as the mass “m” of the body and the square of its velocity “v". If the kinetic energy is 4320 fvlb when the mass is 45 Ib and the velocity is 24 ft/sec, determine the kinetic energy of a 3000 Jb automobile travelling 44 ft/sec. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE - 3 Multiple Choice Questions Four possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (“) the correct answer. Inaratioa: b, aiscalled (@) relation (b) antecedent (©) consequent (@) None of these(@) relation (b) antecedent (©) consequent (a) None of these Ina proportion a : b (a) means ‘extremes (©) third proportional (@)__ None of these (iv) Ina proportion a (a) means ‘extremes (©) fourth proportional (@)__ None of these (¥) In continued proportion @ : b = b : ¢, ac = b?, b is said to be proportional between a and ¢, (a) third (b) fourth (©) means (None of these (vi) Incontinued proportion a: b=: ¢, cis said to be___ proportional to a and b. (a) third (b) fourth (© means (@)__ None of these (vii) Find xin proportion 4 sx ::5: 15 % 3 @) 12 (viii) (b) u=k? (dd) w=1 wo got & yas @) y=ke ow ® (a) (xi) The third proportional of x2 and y? is @ % © © §(xiii) (xiv) (xv) @ (i) (ai) dv) w) (wi) (ii) (viii) (x) The fourth proportional w of x: y2:v: wis @ 2 &) © ov @ If a:b=x:y, then alternando property is @ 4% &) @ ee @ Ifa: b=x:y, then invertendo property is b @ {5 ) box © BP @ € > then componendo property is aie @ aera ) o # @ Write short answers of the following questions. Define ratio and give one example. Define proportion. Define direct variation, Define inverse variation. State theorem of componendo-dividendo. Find x, if 6:42:35. If.x and y? varies directly, and x = 27 when y = 4. Find the value of y when x = 3 If wand v varies inversely, and w = 8, when v = 3. Find vy when w = 12. Find the fourth proportional to 8, 7, 6. Find a mean proportional to 16 and 49. Find a third proportional to 28 and 4. Wy and y= 28 when x =7, 2= 2, then find y. Iz « xy and z = 36 when x = 2, y=3, then find z. Iw «4 and w=2 when v=3, then find w.w Gi) (iii) @) o wi) (vii) wii) x) &) (xi) (xii) xii) (iv) Fill in the blanks jo tt G2 + xy +») The simplest form of the ratio SS Inatatiox: y; xis called Ina ratio a:b; bis called Ina proportion a: b ::x: y; a and y are called Ina proportion p : g:: m:n; q and m are called _ In proportion 7 : 4 ::p :8,p 166: m:: 9 12, then m If.x and y varies directly, then x= __ If vaties directly as w, then u? If w varies inversely as p?, then A third proportional of 12 and 4, is ‘The fourth proportional of 15, 6, 5 is The mean proportional of 4mm?n and p® is. The continued proportion of 4, m and 9 is, —— LON AES = A telation between two quantities of the same kind is called ratio. A proportion is a statement, which is expressed as equivalence of two ratios. If two ratios a: b and ¢ : d are equal, then we can write a:b d “a as If wo quantities are related in such a way that increase (decrease) in one quantity causes increase (decrease) in the other quantity is called direct variation. If two quantities are related in such a way that when one quantity increases, the other decreases is called inverse variation. Theorem on proportions (1) Theorem of Invertendo Ia:b=e:d,thenb:a=dic (2) Theorem of Alternando Ifa:b=e:d,thena:c=bid 3) Theorem of Componendo Ie a:b=e:d,then @ — atb:b=ctd:d Wi) aratb=cre+di) ‘Theorem of Componendo-dividendo If a:b=e:d, then atb:a-b=c+die-d ‘A combination of direct and inverse variations of one or more than one variable forms joint variation. K-Method, @ ‘then a=bk and c=dk 0) ky then a=bk,c=dkand e=/k= SSS eee See pee [ee SS =e eee es Eee In this unit, students will learn how to 2 define proper, improper and rational fraction. & resolve an algebraic fraction into partial fractions when its denominator consists of © non-repeated linear factors, repeated linear factors, ¢ non-repeated quadratic factors, repeated quadratic factors. 2)4.1. Fraction ‘The quotient of two numbers or algebraic expressions is called a fraction. The ‘quotient is indicated by a bar (—). We write, the dividend above the bar and the divisor below the bar. For example, =? isa fraction with x2 #0, 2 ) then the fraction is not defined because x ~ 2 = 0 => x= 2 which makes the denominator of the fraction zero. 4.1.1 Rational Fraction ‘An expression of the form Bo » where M(x) and D(x) are polynomials in x with real coefficients and D(x) #0, is called a rational fraction, es3 2 + DED) GD HD) 4.12 Proper Fraction: For example, are rational fractions, Nu) A rational fraction BO , With D(x) # 0 is called a proper fraction if degree of the polynomial N(x) in the numerator is less than the degree of the polynomial D(x) in the 2 2x-3 3x2 denominator. For example, 7. 3-4 and 357 ate proper fractions, 4.1.3 Improper Fraction: NQ) a , A rational fraction yey, « with D(x) # 0 is called an improper fraction if degree of the polynomial M(x) is greater or equal to the degree of the polynomial D(x. Sr 3842 xt 8. Ted De Tee TDP aT Me improper fractions. Every improper fraction can be reduced by division to the sum of a polynomial and a proper fraction, This means that if degree of the numerator is greater or equal to the degree of the denominator, then we can divide N(x) by D(x) obtaining a quotient polynomial Q(x) and a remainder polynomial R(x), whose degree is less than the degree of D(x). rine M29) 8 qin 19:40: Whee) gue pnd 24 xel RQ ep 8 aproper fraction. For example, is an improper fraction. 2 2 xe a 1)4—2— i.e., an improper fraction th has been resolved to xa 2 ~ 1 and a proper fraction = a quotient polynomial Q(x) = a+ sel (REMDILED Resotve the fraction “SS into proper fraction QD Let No) = - 2 +4 Land Dexyer +5x-l By long division, wehave x2 +5) B= + x41 —e tSx =P ade 41 ze FS 46 ~ 4x46 P45 (txt) 2x+5 tt 2x @ Dery “DG ME e-D ‘Activity: Convert the following improper fractions into proper fractions. oia2=l cp BESE=E axe] 2x2 — x 4.2 Resolution of Fraction into Partial Fractions 1 4 Consider 7. FF] GS of three fractions each of which is prefixed by a positive or negative sign. It is easy to find a single fraction, which is equal to the sum of, these fractions 24 x4) dy ede- DOH Thus welt xs xa Det) Ope? + Qe p44 x@-D OF) _ Be 43r—4 =x0= Dor D 3x2 + 3x-4 The single fraction = Ty. is the simplified form of the given fractions and is 24 known as resultant fraction, The given fractions —— . 7 and 5 are called components or partial fractions. In this chapter, we shall be given a rational fraction (or resultant fraction) and required to find its partial fractions, Every proper fraction BO | with D(x) # 0 can be resolved into an algebraic sum of partial fractions as follows:4.2.1 Resolution of an algebraic fraction into partial fractions, when D(x) consists of non-repeated linear factors. Rule I: If linear factor (ax + b) occurs as a factor of D(x), then there is a partial fraction of aALp where is a constant tobe found mid In Degy the polynomial D(x) may be written as, DO) = (yx +b) (yx +B.) on (age +B) with all factors distinct. N@) Ar As Ay Wehave, Dix) ~ Gat, *ayx+b; taxed, to tax, where A, A) ... 4, are constants to be determined, The following examples illustrate how we can find these constants: Sx+4 ; (EEDDTED Resolve Spc, gp into partial fractions r —5s+4 AB GMM: ha ats o ‘Multiplying throughout by (x 4) (x + 2), we get Sxt4=A(x42)+B(-4) i) Equation (i) is an identity, which holds good for all values of x and hence for and x= ~2. =4=0 ie, x=4 (factor corresponding to A) on both sides of the equation (ii), Put we get 5@)+4=A4+2) => [Aza] Put x+2=Oie, 2 (factor corresponding to B), we get 5(-2)+4=BC2-4) > ~6 Bel ‘Thus required partial fractions are Sxe4 44 * = Aix #2) x This method is called the zero’s method. This method is especially useful with linear factors in the denominator D(x), Hence, Identity: An identity is an equation, which is satisfied by all the values of the variables imoived Foreman, 26¢4 1)=2¢+2 and 2 nea too the osarton eid by all aes of @ Mathematics 10ENTLED Resolve into partial fractions. 34x-2e QAM 5, ps cam be written as for convenience 5 > ‘The denominator D (x) = 2x? - x -3 = 2x? -3x+2x-3 (x= 3) +1 2x3) =(r+ DQx-3) 1 =1 AB 8 BEL a= 3 GF DO-IT IF ‘Multiplying both the sides by (x + 1) (2x -3), we get AQx-3)+BG+1) Equating coefficients of x and constants on both sides, we get 2A+B=0 (i) Let, Gi) Solving @) and (i), we get A = and B 1 Fex-28 7 See ‘Thus, Note: General method applicable to resolve all rational fractions of the form ae is as follows: (The numerator N(x) must be of lower degree than the denominator D(x) (ii) We degree of N(x) is greater than the degree of D(x), then division is used and the remainder fraction R(x) can be broken into partial fractions, (iii) Make substitution of constants accordingly. (iv) Multiply both the sides by L.C.M. () Arrange the terms on both sides in descending order. (vi) quate the coefficients of like powers of x on both sides, we get as many as equations as there are constants in assumption. (vii) Solving these equations, we can find the values of constants. = ‘RCISE 4.1 — Resolve into partial fractions. Ix=9 Gre 2 3 x25 3x03 Ix=25 4 Bead 5 Gerd 6G Ha-3 es2etl 6x3 + Sx? -7 2+ 3) 3x 2x14.2.2. Resolution of a fraction when D(x) consists of repeated linear factors. Rule Il: If a linear factor (ax + b) occurs n times as a factor of D(x), then there are m partial fractions of the form. AL Ay Ay Geet By xt bit” + Gece pyr: Where Ay Ay ~ °A, ate constants and n2 2 is a positive integer, A A, A, x) ~ (ax +b) (ax + by (ax+ by ‘The method of finding constants and resolving into partial fractions is explained by the following example. [REIT Resolve wep into partial fractions. c 2 1 AB G&D x- 1-1 x-2 Multiplying both sides by (1)? (x—2), we get = A(x — Ie 2) + Bex 2) + Ce 1 => AQ?—3x+2) 4 Blr—2) + C2241 Since (i) is an identity and is true for all values of x Put x-1=0 or x=1in@),we get BO -2 => -Be1 or Be-1 Put x-2=0 or x=2in(),we get CQ-1P=1 = C=L Equating coefficients of x2 on both the sides of (i) A+C=0 = A=-CsoA=-1 ‘Hence required partial fractions are = 4 1 &—1F* @—2) 1 a * = @-2) > x427G EP EXERCISE 42 Resolve into partial fractions. RSME Le, @ Thus, 1 eW3r+1 2 24741 9 @-1P@-D +P O+3) @— Dera? 4 xl 5 Te+4 1 2 (x-1) (Bx + 2)x + 1? (x-1PAx +1) 3x2 + 154 16 1 8. (+P (= De+)42.3 Resolution of fraction when D(x) consists of non-repeated irreducible quadratic factors. Rule TIL: If a quadratic factor (ax? + bx + ¢) with a # 0 occurs once as a factor of D(x), the partial fraction is of the form Tae Tera: Whete A and Bare constants o be found. PRENTTD Resolve Tere into partial fractions. 1x43 A_ | Br+c =F +N GH 49 Multiplying both the sides by (x3) (2 +9) = Urt3=AG+9)+ Bret © (x-3) = lx+3=AG? +9) + Bot - 3x) + Ce-3) @ Since (i) is an identity, we have on substituting 3343=A(9+9) => 184=36 > A=2 ‘Comparing the coefficients of x? and x on both the sides of (i), we get. A+B=0 = B=-2 “3B+C=1l > 3(-2)+C=11 = C=5 =2et5 P49 SUMED Let ‘Therefore, the partial fractions are a Resolve into partial fractions. 1 3x11 , 3x47 4 1 oe +D + DAH DED 4 9-7 5 3x47 , 2 a e+) 5 Gera DD 1 1 1 241 1 Bel [um seep e aT 8 FH 4.2.4 Resolution of a fraction when D(x) has repeated irreducible quadratic factors. Rule IV: If a quadratic factor (ax? + bx + c) with a #0, occurs twice in the denominator, the corresponding partial fractions are Ax+B Cx+D t+ bx 6 * P+ bx OP ‘The constants A, B, Cand D are found in the usual way,REDD Resolve AF into para fractions. am is a proper fraction as degree of numerator is less than the degree of denominator. =22-2 Ax+B Cx+D G4? ~ eel (2+? ‘Multiplying both the sides by (x? + 1), we have W322 2= (Ax +B) (2 + 1) + Cr+ D 2-22-25 Ad +3) + BO? + 1)+Cx+D (i) Equating the coefficients of x3, x2, x and constant on both the sides of (i). Coefficients of x°: Coefficients of x: Let Coefficients of x: Constants: -2+2=0 > D=0 e-2e-2 x Thus “G+ IP +1 @ +P GEIR tone 2 in pari fons 2ee1 A BrsC) Dxt+E @- Deseo x-1 tee tee Pe Multiplying both the sides by (x — I)(a? + 1)? De 1S AG? 4124 Bx = 102 +1) + De + HexD) @ Now we use zeros’ method, Put x~ 1 = 0 orx= 1 in (i), we get FSIMED Assume that 35, (+p? = A=> Now writing terms of (i) in descending order. Det SAG! + 2x24 1) + Brot 2 +r 1) + CUP x +x 1) + DP = 2) + BO) or Det LSA (2241) +B Ot + =a) + CO 24 x= 1) + DOP= + EHD) Equating coefficients of x4, x8, 2°, and x on both the sides. Coefficients of x4: A+B=0 Coefficients of x3: -B+C=0 = C=) Coefficients of?) 2A4B-C+D=0 = D=Z Coefficients of x: -B+C-D4+E=2 i dadseer 9 p22, “Veet 3 ‘Thus required partial fractions ae G5 + IGT ta DE . 2x41 3 3@+1) _Gx-1) Doe + IP He-1) 407 +1) 2G? +E =—\) EXERCISE 4.4 §-—= Resolve into partial fractions. i wie3exel wa 2 Gere , . — + DG? +1? (= D0? + DF Pa fa 5 (+27 ° (+? MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE - 4 1. Multiple Choice Questions Four possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (7) the correct answer. wo The identity (Sx + 4)? = 25x? + 40x + 16 is true for (@) one value of x (B) two values of x (0) all values of x (@) none of these Gi) A function of the form f (x) = ad with D(x) # 0, where N(x) and D(x) are polynomials in x is called (a) anidentity (6) anequation (©) afraction (@) none of these Gi) A fraction in which the degree of the numerator is greater or equal to the degree of denominator is called (@)_—aproper fraction (®)—_animproper fraction (©) anequation (@) algebraic relation (iv) A fraction in which the degree of numerator is less than the degree of the denominator is called (a) anequation (6) an improper fraction (©) anidentity (@_—— aproper fraction 2x4 © pep" (a) an improper fraction (b) an equation (©) aproper fraction (@ none of these(vii) (viii) (ax) @&) (+32 =x + 6x4 9is (a) alinear equation (6) an equation © an identity @ ‘none of these +l . = Da +2)* (a) aproper fraction (b) an improper fraction (©) anidentity (d) a constant term Partial fractions of are of the form x-2 @—De+2) AB @ Sth? o Bx+C o Apts o x+2 Partial fractions: tes De D are of the form A B A_ Bx+C€ @ yeTt4d eit 42 Ar+BC Bx © yeT tH 42 OD yatta? 241 Partial fractions of [yj —y ae of the form A B @ TS ® 1+ Ax+B oC © @ Cnty Write short answers of the following questions. Define a rational fraction. Gi) What is a proper fraction? (ii) What is an improper fraction? (iv) What are partial fractions? (%) How can we make partial fractions of = (vi) Resolve + into partial fractions z 3 (ii) Find partial fractions of —yq—yy (iil) Resolve [55 into partial fractions. ¢ (x) How we can make the partial fractions of +, (+ ayx—a) (x) Whether (x + 3)? = x? + 6x +9 is an identity?‘A fraction is an indicated quotient of two numbers or algebraic expressions. pmarineitts form 2, with D(a) #0 and N(x) and D(x) ate polynomials in x with real coefficients, is called a rational fraction. Every fractional expression can bbe expressed as a quotient of two polynomials. > A rational fraction = with D(x) # 0 is called a proper fraction if degree of the polynomial N(x), in the numerator is less than the degree of the polynomial D(x), in the denominator. > A rational fraction BO with D(x) # 0 is called an improper fraction if degree of the polynomial N(x) is greater or equal to the degree of the polynomial D(x) > Partial fractions: Decomposition of resultant fraction ao with DG) #0, when (@) D(x) consists of non-tepeated linear factors. (6) D(®) consists of repeated linear factors. (©) D() consists of non-repeated irreducible quadratic factors, () DG) consists of repeated irreducible quadratic factors.ca we www In this unit, students will learn how to sets recall the sets denoted by N, W, Z, E, 0, P and Q. recognize operation on sets (U, 7,\, --) perform operations on sets union, intersection, difference, complement. give formal proofs of the following fundamental properties of union and intersection of two or three sets. commutative property of union, ‘commutative property of intersection, associative property of union, associative property of intersection, distributive property of union over intersection, distributive property of intersection over union, De Morgan’s laws. verify the fundamental properties for given sets. use Venn diagram to represent * union and intersection of sets, © complement of a set. use Venn diagram to verify © commutative law for union and intersection of sets, * De Morgan’s laws, * associative laws, @ distributive laws. recognize ordered pairs and cartesian product. define binary relation and identify its domain and range. define function and identify its domain, co-domain and range. demonstrate the following * into function, * one-one function, ¢ into and one-one function (injective function), ¢ onto function (surjective function), ¢ one-one and onto function (bijective function). examine whether a given relation is a function or not. differentiate between one-one correspondence and one-one function. include sufficient exercises to classify/differentiate between the above (os.5.1 SETS ‘A sot is a well-defined collection of objects and itis denoted by capital letters A, B, C ete. 5.1.1()Some Important Sets: In set theory, we usually deal with the following sets of numbers denoted by standard symbols: N= The set of natural numbers = (1,2, 3,4, +=} W= The set of whole numbers = (0, 1, 2,3, 4, =} Z= The set of all integers = {0, +1, 42, 43, E= The set of all even integers = (0, +2, 24, = The set of all odd integers = (£1, 23, 45, +=} P= The set of prime numbers = {2, 3, 5,7, 11, 13, 17, +} Q= The set of all rational numbers = (x1x=7, where m,n € Zand n #0) Of = The set of all irrational numbers = (x 1x47", where m,n € Zand n #0} R= The set of all real numbers = Qu Q’. S.L.1(i) Recognize operations on sets (U, 0,\,..): (a) Union of sets The union of two sets A and B written as AU B (read as A union B) is the set consisting of all the elements which are either in A or in B ot in both, Thus AUB=(alxe Aorxe Borxe Aand B both} For example, if = {1, 2, 3, 4) and B= (4, 5, 6,7), then. AU B= (1, 2,3, 4,5, 6,7} (b) Intersection of sets The intersection of two sets A and B, written as A 7 B (read as ‘A intersection B’) is the set consisting of all the common elements of A and B. Thus AOB=(alxe Aand xe B). Cleatly re ANB xe Aandxe B For example, if = {a, b, c, d) and B AOB=(c,d) (© Difference of sets IFA and B are two sets, then their difference A ~ B or A\ Bis defined as: A~B=(ilxe Aandxe B} Similarly B-A={xl xe Band xe A} For example, if A = (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) and B= (2, 4,5, 6, 8), then A~B=(1,2,3,4,5}—(2,4,5,6,8} = (1,3) Also B-A=(2,4,5,6,8}~{1,2,3,4,5} = (6.8). c,d, e, fl, then(a) Complement of a set If U is a universal set and A is a subset of U, then the complement of A is the set of those elements of U, which are not contained in A and is denoted by A “or A‘. A’SUWA= (lve Unde A). For example, if U= (1, 2, 3, ... 10} and A = {2, 4, 6, 8}, then A‘=U-A 1,2, 3, .., 10) — (2,4, 6, 8) = {1,3,5, 7,9, 10} 5.1.1(ii) Perform operations on sets: RNID 1 = (1, 2,3, ... 10), A= (2,3, 5,7}, B= (3, 5, 8), then find (AUB (ANB (ii) A-B (iv) A’and B” EMM A B= 2,3,5,7303,5,8) = (2,3,5,7.8) 2, 3,5, 7}. (3, 5.8) = (3,5) (ii) AB = (2, 3, 5, 7) \ (3, 5, 8} =(2.7) (iv) A’= U-A= (1, 2,3, ..., 10} - {2,3, 5,7) = (1,4,6,8,9, 10) B’=U-B={1, 2,3, ..., 10} — (3, 5, 8} = (1, 2,4, 6,7, 9, 10} = TET 1 If X={1, 4,7, 9} and Y= (2, 4,5, 9} Then find: (i) xXuY (ii) XnY (iii) YuX (iv) Y¥oX jet of prime numbers less than or equal to 17 and Y= Set of first 12 natural numbers, then find the following Gian, @ xu (i) YUX Git) XaY (iv) ¥ax 3. Y= ZT = O',then find) @) = XU¥ Gi) xXuT Gi) Yur Ww) xn @ XAT wi) YAT 4 If Us (xlre N A3 xeA or xeB (by definition of union of sets) => xeB or xed > xe BUA = AUBCBUA @ Now letye BUA > yeB or yea (by definition of union of sets) = yeA or yeB => yeAUB = BUACAUB a From (i and (ii), we have AU B= BUA. (by definition of equal sets) (b) Commutative property of intersection For any two sets A and B, prove that A. B= Proof:Let xe ANB => xeAandxeB (by definition of intersection of sets) => xeBandxeA > xe BOA aA ANBCBOA a Now letye BOA = yeBandyeA (by definition of intersection of sets) => yeAandye B => yeAnR Therefore, = BOACANB a) From (i) and (ii), wehave ANB=BOA (by definition of equal sets) (©) Associative property of union For any three sets A, B and C, prove that (AUB) UC=AU (BUC)@ Proof: © Proof: Let xe AUB)UC > xe(AUB) or xe € => xeAorxe Borxe€ => xeAorxe BUC > reAUBUO > AUB)UCCAUEUO, @ Similarly AUBUOQCAUB)UC ey From (i) and (ii), we have AUB)UC=AUBUQ) Associative property of intersection For any three sets A, B and C, prove that (A 0 B) A C=AN (BAO) Let xe ANB)NC = xe (ANB) and xe => @eA and xe B) and xe C => xeA and (ve Band € C) => xeA and xe BAC > xEAABOO * NB)AC GC ANBNO @ Similarly = AN@AQ cs AnB)AC Gi) From (i) and (i), we have (OB)NC=AN BOO Distributive property of union over intersection For any three sets A, B and C, prove that AU (BO) = (AUB) (ALO) Let xe AUBNO => xeAorxe BOC = xe Aor (ve Band xe ©) = (WEA or xe B)and (ve A or xe C) > > xe AUBandxe AUC xe AUB) NAUO) Therefore AU (BAC) CAUB)N(AUO) @ Similarly, now let ye (AUB) (AUO) = ye AUB)andye (AU) => (We Aorye B)and (ve Aotye ©) = ye Aorge Bandye O => yedorye BNC => yeAUBNO = AYBAALOCAUVENO Gi) From (i) and (ii), we have AU (BOC) =(AUB)O(AUO)(3) Proof: Gi) Distributive property of intersection over union For any three sets A, B and C, prove that A 9 (BUC) = (ANB) UANO) Let xe AN(BUC) => xeA and xe BUC > xe A and WeB or xe) => (eA and xeB) or (re A and xe ©) = EAN) or («@eANO) = re(ANB)UANO ANBUO cANBUANO 0 Similarly (ANB)UANO CANBLO ai) From (j) and (fi), we have A (BUC) = ANB)UANO ‘De-Morgan’s laws For any two sets A and B @ — AuBy=a'nB Gi) AnBy=a'UR Let xe AUBY => x€AUB (by definition of complement of set) => xe@A and xeB => red ad xeB > xe ANB (by definition of intersection of sets) = AvuBy CAB @ Similarly A’ Bc (AU BY (id) Using (i) and (ii), we have (Aw BY =A’ B Let xe AMBY => 1€AnB > xe AorxeB = xeA’orxe BY > xe AUB’ => ANBY cA’UB’ @ Let ye A‘UB’ > yeA’oryeB’ > yeAoryeB => yeAnB => ye AnBy => AUBC(AnBY Gi) From (i) and (ii), we have proved that (AnBy=A’UB’=—1) EXERCISE 1 kX =(1,3,5,7, +++, 19}, and Z={2,3,5,7, 11, 13,17, 19,23), 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, ---, 20} then find the following: @® xXu~ey @ KuY)uz Gi) XAWAD Gy) &AY)aZ @ xUuYaD wi) KUY)AKUD oi) XAYUD (iil) XAY)VUEND 2 WA={1,2,3,4,5,6}, B= (2,4,6,8}, C=(1,4,8). Prove the following identities: @ = ANB=BOA Gi) AUB=BUA Gi) ANBYUO=ANB|UANO @) AUBAO=AVB NAO 3. TF U={1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 10) A=(1,3,5,.7,9), B= (23.5.7), then verify the De-Morgan’s Laws je, (ANB = AUB and (AUBY =A’ 4 EU ={1,2,3,-,20, X= {1,3,7,9, 15, 18, 20) and Y= {1,3,5,++, 17), then show that @ = x-Y=xnr Gi) Y-X=¥nx 5.1.2(v) Verify the fundamental properties for given sets: (@) A and B are any two subsets of U, then A UB = B UA (commutative law). For example A ={1, 3, 5, 7) and B= (2,3, 5,7) then AUB=(1,3,5,7) U (23,5, 7) = (1, 2,3,5,7) and BUA=(2,3,5, 7} U (13,5, 7) = (1, 2,3,5,7) Hence, verified that AU B=BUA. (b) Commutative property of intersection For example A={1, 3, 5, 7} and B= [2, 3, 5,7) ‘Then AOB=(1,3,5,7}.0(2,3,5, 7) =(3,5,7) and BOA=(2,3,5, 7} 0(1,3,5, 7) = (3,5, 7) Hence, verified that A. B= BOA. (©) IfA,B and C are the subsets of U, then (A UB) UC (Associative law) Suppose A= and vBevO. 12,48) B= (2.4.6) 4,5, 6}= AUBUC = ((1,2,4,8} U (2,4, 6)) U3, 4, 5, 6} = (1,2,4,6,8) U (3,4, 5, 6) 1,2,3,4,5,6,8} vBvO 1, 2,4, 8) U({2, 4, 6} U (3, 4,5, 6)) = (1,2,4,8) U (2, 3,4, 5,6) 1,2,3,4,5,6,8} LHS.=RHS. Hence, union of sets is associative. (@)__ IfA,B and C are the subsets of U, then (A MB) AC=A (BAO) (Associative Law) Suppose A (1.2.48); B= (2,4,6) and C= (3, 4, 5, 6} then LHS. = ANB)NC (C1, 2, 4,8} 9 (2, 4, 6)) 0 (3, 4, 5, 6} {2,4}. (3,4,5,6}= (4) and RHS. = ANBOO, {1,2,4, 8) 02, 4, 6}. (3,4, 5, 6) (1,24, 8) 0 (4,6)= (4) LHS. = RHS. Hence, intersection of sets is associative. Distributive laws (©) Union is distributive over intersection of sets If A, B and C ate the subsets of universal set U, then AUB A ©) = (A U BVA LC) Solution: Suppose A = {1, 2, 4. 8}, B= (2, 4,6} and C= (3,4, 5, 6) then LHS =AUBNO) 1,2,4,8} (2,4, 6) 0 (3,4, 5, 6) 1,24, 8) U (4,6) = (1, 2,4, 6,8) and RHS=(AUB)V(AUO) (1,2, 4,8) U (2,4,6)) 01, 2,4, 8) U (3,4, 5, 6) 1,2,4, 6,8) 0 (1, 2,3,4,5,6,8) 1,2,4,6,8) LHS=RHS and RES.Intersection is distributive over union of sets To provea n(BUC)=(ANB)UANO) Suppose A = (1,2,3,4,5,---,20} B= (5,10, 15, 20, 25, 30) C= {3,9, 15, 21, 27, 33} LHS. = ANBUO = {1,2,3,4,5, +++, 20} A ({5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30} U (3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 33) = (1,2,3.4,5, «=, 20) 4 (3, 5, 9, 10, 15, 20, 21, 25, 27, 30, 33} = {3,5,9, 10, 15, 20} RHS.= ANB)UANO = (1, 2,3, 4, +++, 20) 9 {5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30}) UCL, 2, 3,45, 2+, 20-9 (3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 33)) = {5, 10, 15, 20} U {3, 9, 15) = (3,5, 9, 10, 15, 20} LHS.=RHS. (g) De Morgan's Laws (4 BY = A’UBY and (A UBY'=A’NB" Suppose U=(1,2,3,4, 10) A=(2,4,6,8, 10} = A’= (1,3,5,7,9} B=(1,2,3,4,5,6) —> B’=(7,8,9, 10) Now considerA VB = {2,4,6,8, 10} 9 (1,2, 3,4, 5, 6} {2.4.6} (AnBy = U-(ANB) {1, 2.3.4, +++, 10} — (2, 4, 6) (1,3, 5,7, 8,9, 10) AUB (1,3, 5,7, 9} U{7,8,9, 10} = {1,3,5,7, 8, 9, 10) Then LHS. and RHS. LHS. = RES. (AUBY =A 0B Suppose U= (1, 2,3,4, +, 10) A= (2,4,6,8, 10) = A’= (1,3,5,7,9} B=(1,2,3,4,5,6) = B’=(7,8,9, 10) Now considerAUB = {2,4,6,8, 10) U {1,2,3,4,5, 6} {1,2,3,4,5, 6, 8, 10) (AU BY = U-(AUB) = (1,2,3,4, 10) ~ (1, 2,3, 4, 5, 6,8, 10) (7,9) 1,3,5, 7,9} (7,8, 9, 10) LHS. and RHS=.5.1.3 VENN DIAGRAM British mathematician John Venn (1834 ~ 1923) introduced rectangle for a universal set U and its subsets A and B as closed figures inside this rectangle. 5.1.3(vi) Use Venn diagrams to represent: (@) Union and intersection of sets Disjoint sets Overlapping sets AB U U U “1| @S || Fig. 1 Fig. 2 u u 4#11@O@)|| &® Fig.4 Fig. 5 (Regions shown by horizontal line segments in figures 1 to 6) (©) Complement ofa set = U—A=A’is shown by horizontal line segments. A 5.13 (vii) Use Venn diagram to verify: (@) Commutative law for union and intersection of sets Ui B= (x Ry such that y= 2r for x€ A, ye B} => R={2,4),B,6).(4,8)} Dom R= {2, 3,4) ¢ A and Rang R= (4, 6,8) ¢ B. CRETE Suppose A = (1, 2, 3, 4} and B = (1, 2, 3, 5} Form arelation R:A—>B = {x Ry such that x+ y= = R={(1,5), 6,3), 4,2)} Dom R= (1, 3,4) CA and Rang R = (2,35) CB 5.3 Function or Map 5.3. (i) Suppose A and B are two non-empty sets, then relation f : A —> B is called a function if @) Dom f= (i) every x € A appears in one and only one ordered pair in f Alternate Definition: Suppose A and B are two non-empty sets, then relation f: A > Bis called a function if @) Dom f= (ii) V xe A we can associate some unique image element y= fix) € B. forxe A,ye BY Domain, Co-domain and Range of Function: If f : A — B is a function, then A is called the domain of f and B is called the co-domain of f, Domain f is the set consisting of all first elements of each ordered pair in f and range ‘Fis the set consisting of all second elements of each ordered pait in fETD Suppose A= {0,1,2,3} and Define a function f:A > B S=M& y)ly=x41Vxe A, ye B) f= (0,1, (1,2),2.3), 8.4} Dom f ={0,1,2,3}=A Rang f= ({1,2,3,4) cB. B={1,2,3,4,5} Sed The following are the examples of relations but not functions. is not a function, because an element a € A has two images in set B and h is not a function because an element d ¢ A has no image in set B. £ A a ‘ \ ’ >4 | ————— : Os d Sera see Sat Sab 5.3(ii) Demonstrate the followin (a) Into function: A function f: A > Bis called an £ into function, if at least one element in B is, not an image of some element of set A i.e, Range of fc set B. \__ SG For example, we define « function ff (f:A—> B such that —— £={0,1),.0, D, 2, 3), B,D} where A={0,1,2,3} and B= (1,2, 3,4) SetA SeB Fis an into function (b) —One-one function: A function f : A ~ B is called one-one function, if all distinct elements of A have distinct images in B, ie. flrs) =flrs) > m=m€ A or Vaueme A => flr) Asia)For example, if A= {0, 1, 2, 3} and B= {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}, then we define a function f: A > B such that fa (Gylysxtl,Vxe Aye B). = (0,1). 0,2), 2,3), 8,4)} ‘is one-one function. ) Set A Set B (©) Into and one-one function: (injective function) ‘The function f discussed in (b) is also an into function. Thus fis an into and one-one function. (@ —Anonto or surjective function: A function f: A — Bis called an onto function, if every element of set B is an image of at least one element of set Aiie., Range of f= B. For example, if A= (0, 1, 2, 3} and B= (1, 2, 3}, then f: A — B such that f= (, 1D), 2, 2 3). B,D} Here Rang f= (1, 2,3) =B. Thus f so defined is an onto function, Set A SetB (©) __ Bijective function or one to one correspondence: A function f : A > B is called f bijective function iff function f is one- For example, if A= (1, 2, 3, 4} and B= (2,3, 4,5} We define a function f:A > B such that fa (@lyaxtl, We Aye BY Then f= {(1, 2), 2, 3), 3,4), (4, 5)} Evidently this function is one-one because distinct elements of A have distinct images in B. This is an onto function also because every element of B is the image of atleast, one element of A. iSuppose A = {1,23} B= {1,2,3,4,5, 6} We define a function f:A—>B = {(x,)) y= 2x, ¥xe A,ye B} Then f= (1, 2), 2.4), 3, 6)} Evidently this function is one-one but not an onto £ 5.3(iii) Examine whether a given relation is a function: A relation in which each x € its domain, has a unique image in its range, is a function, 5.3(iv) Differentiate between one-to-one correspondence and one-one function: ‘A function f from set A to set B is one-one if distinct elements of A has distinct images in B. The domain of fis A and its range is contained in B. In one-to-one correspondence between two sets A and B, each element of either set is, assigned with exactly one element of the other set. If the sets A and B are finite, then these sets have the same number of elements, that is, n(A) , b,c}, M = (3, 4), then find two binary relations of Lx M and Mx L. 2. If Y= (-2, 1, 2}, then make two binary relations for ¥ x ¥. Also find their domain and range. 3. If L= {a,b,c} and M=(d,e,f,g), then find two binary relations in each: @ LxL Gi) Lx (ii) MxM If set M has 5 elements, then find the number of binary relations in M. 5. WL=(elreN a xs5), M = (ylye P » y<10}, then make the following relations from L to M @ R= {&y)ly B by Venn diagram. When A cB Show by Venn diagram A (BU ©) Define intersection of two sets. Define a function, Define one-one function, Define an onto function. Define a bijective function. ‘Write De Morgan's laws. Fill in the blanks If ACB, thenAUB= If ANB =6 then and Bare If ACBand BCA then The complement of Vis ‘The complement of gis Ana AVA — The set (xlxe A and x¢ B)= — The point (-5, ~7) lies in quadrant, ‘The point (4, ~6) lies in quadrant. The y co-ordinate of every point is on-a-axis. ‘The x co-ordinate of every point is on-y-anis, The domain of {((a, b), (b, €) (¢, d)) is The range of {(a, a), (b, b), (c, o)} is Venn-diagram was first used by A subset of A x A is called the in, If f: A—> B and range of f= B, then fis an ___ function. The relation {(a, b), (b, ), (a, d)} is a function.A sets the well defined collection of objects with some common properties. Union of two sets A and B denoted by A U B is the set containing elements which either belong to A or to B or to both, Intersection of two sets A and B denoted by A © B is the set of common elements of both A and B. In symbols A 4B = (x 1x € A and x € B} The set difference of B and A denoted by B — A is the set of all those elements of B which do not belong to A. Complement of a set A wrt. universal set U denoted by A® = A’ = U— A contains all those elements of U which do not belong to A. British mathematician John Venn (1834 — 1923) introduced rectangle for a universal set U and its subsets A and B as closed figures inside this rectangle. An otdeted pair of elements is written according to a specific order for which the order of elements is strictly maintained. Cartesian product of two non-empty sets A and B denoted by A x B consists of all ordered pairs (x,y) such that x € A,y ¢ B. If A and B are any two non-empty sets, then a non empty subset R CA x B is called binary relation from set A into set B. If A and B are two non empty sets, then relation f : A —> B is called a function if (i) Dom f= set A (ii) every x € A appears in one and only one ordered pair € f. Dom f is the set consisting of all first elements of each ordered pair ¢ f and Rang of Fis the set consisting of all second elements of each ordered pair € f. A function f : A — B is called an into function if at least one element in B is not an image of some element of set A ie, range of f B. A function f : A — B is called an onto function if every element of set B is an image of at least one element of set A ie., range of f= B. A function f : A — B is called one-one function if all distinet elements of A have distinct images in B A function f : A B is called bijective function iff function f is one-one and onto,wo we ww In this unit, students will learn how to construct grouped frequency table. construct histograms with equal and unequal class intervals. construct a frequency polygon. construct a cumulative frequency table. draw a cumulative frequency polygon. calculate (for ungrouped and grouped data) © arithmetic mean by definition and using deviations from assumed ‘mean. calculate median, mode, geometric mean, harmonic mean. recognize properties of arithmetic mean. calculate weighted mean and moving averages. estimate median, quartiles and mode graphically. measure range, variance and standard deviation.6.1 Frequency Distribution A frequency distribution is a tabular arrangement for classifying data into different ‘groups and the number of observations falling in each group corresponds to the respective ‘group. The data presented in the form of frequency distribution is called Grouped Data. Hence a frequency distribution is a method to summarize data. 6.1) Construction of Frequency Table On the basis of types of variable or data, there are two types of frequency distribution. These are: (a) Discrete Frequency Distribution. (b) Continuous Frequency Distribution. (a) Discrete Frequency Table Following steps are involved in making of a discrete frequency distribution: () Find the minimum. and maximum observation in the data and write the values of the variable in the variable column from minimum to the maximum. Gi) Record the observations by using tally marks. (Vertical bar ‘') Gii) Count the tally and write down the frequency in the frequency column. Five coins are tossed 20 times and the number of heads recorded at each toss are ‘given below: 3, 4, 2,3, 3,5,2,2,2.1, 1,2,1,4,2,2,3,3,4,2 Make frequency distribution of the number of heads observed. Let X = Number of Heads. The frequency distribution is given below: ‘Frequency distribution of number of heads x ‘Tally Marks |__ Frequeney 1 i 3 2 i 8 3 Ww 5 4 i 3 5 I 1 (6) Continuous Frequency Table ‘The making of continuous frequency distribution involves the following steps: (i) Find the Range, where Range = Xax — Xnis (the difference between ‘maximum and minimum observations). (ii) Decide about the number of groups (denote it by k) into which the data is to be classified (usually an integer between 5 and 20). Usually it depends upon the range. The larger the range the more the number of groups, (iii) Determine the size of class (denote by ) by using the formula: R n=“SES (Use formula when “b” is not given) Note: The rule of approximation is relaxed in determining h. For example, h = 7.1 or h=7.9 may be taken as 8,(iv) Start writing the classes or groups of the frequency distribution usually’ starting ftom the minimum observation and keeping in view the size of al class. (v) Record the observations from the data by using tally marks. (vi) Count the number of tally marks and record them in the frequency column, for each class. RBM ne following are the marks obtained by 40 students in mathematic of lass X. ‘Make a frequency distribution with a class interval of size 10. 51, 55, 32, 41, 22, 30, 35, 53, 30, 60, 59, 15, 7, 18, 40, 49, 40, 25, 14, 18,19, 2, 43, 22, 39, 26, 34, 19, 10, 17, 47, 38, 13, 30, 34, $4, 10, 21, 51, 52. GME Let X = marks of a student From the above data we have Xran = 2, Xmax = 60, It is given that h = 10. We can) either start from 2 or the nearest smallest integer 0 for our convenience, There are two ways to make frequency distribution (@) We may write the actual observations falling in the respective groups. This is given as follows: Classes/Groups Observations Frequency o—9 2.7 2 1o— 19 | 10, 10, 13, 14, 15, 17,18, 18. 19,19 10 20 — 29 21, 22, 22, 25, 26 3 30 — 39 30, 30, 30, 32, 34, 34, 35, 38, 39 9 40—49 40,40, 41, 43, 47, 49 6 50 — 59 51, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 59 7 60 — 69 0. 1 (b) Use tally marks for recording each observation in the respective group. This is given in the following table: Classes/Groups | Tally Marks | Frequency o-—9 i 2 10-—19 TNUTAL 10 20-— 29 Ml Ss 30-— 39 A 0 9 40 -—49 MU 6 50-— 59 Mm 7 60-—— 69 I 1 Total 40 Note: The solution (b) is usually adopted to construct a frequency distribution. Concepts involved in a Continuous frequency table: The following terms are frequently used in a continuous frequency distribution:(a) Class Limits: The minimum and the maximum values defined for a class or ‘group ate called Class limits. The minimum value is called the lower class limit and the ‘maximum value is called the upper class limit of that class. In example 2, the lower class limits are 0, 10, 20, 30 ete., while the upper class limits are 9, 19, 29, 39 ete. (b) Class Boundaries: As a continuous frequency distribution is based on measurable characteristic variable which involves the rule of approximation to record any observation. From example 2, some class boundaries are given below: Glass limits [ Class Boundaries 0-9 ~05-—95) 19 == 19) 95-195 29---29 [195-295 Hence referring to example 2, we may say that the real lower class limit of 10 is 9.5, as all values between 9.5 and 10.49 are recorded as 10. While the upper class limit of 19 is, 19,5 as all values between 18.5 and 19.5 are recorded as 19. The real class limits of a class are called class boundaries, A class boundary is obtained by adding two successive class limits and dividing the sum by 2. The value so obtained is taken as upper class boundary for the previous class and lower class boundary for the next class. (©) Midpoint or Class Mark: For a given class the average of that class obtained by dividing the sum of upper and lower class limits by 2, is called the midpoint or class mark of that class, (@) Cumulative Frequency: The total of frequency up to an upper class limit or boundary is called the cumulative frequency. ‘The above concepts have been explained with reference to Example 2 below: GEENNIED Compute class boundaries, class marks and cumulative frequency for data of example 2 AMD computation fotlows, Class ‘Midpoint/ ‘Cumulative Boundaries | Class mark | FT°4¥"°Y | frequency 2 Class limits 9 ~05 -—— 95 45 2 19 | 95-195 14.5 10 2410=12 29 | 195295 24.5 5 1245=17 39 | 295395 34.5 9 17+9=26 49 | 395—49.5 44.5 6 26+ 6=32 59_| 495 —59.5 54.5 7 3247 =39 59.5 — 69.5 64.5 1 39+ 1=40 40,6.1(ii) Construction of Histograms Histogram A Histogram is a graph of adjacent rectangles constructed on X¥-plane. It is a graph of frequency distribution. In practice both discrete and continuous frequency distributions are represented by means of histogram. However there is a little difference in the construction! procedure. We explain this with the help of examples. Equal Intervals Histogram: GREENE Make a Histogram of the following distribution of the number of heads when 5 coins were tossed, X (umber of heads) | Frequency 0 We proceed as follows, ‘Step 1: Mark the values of variable X along x-axis using a suitable interval. ‘Step 2: Mark the frequency along y-axis using a suitable scale. Step 3: At each interval make a rectangle of height corresponding to the respective: frequency of values of the variable X. The resulting Histogram is given below: ® ‘Scale akin: 7 smal ster 1 Yu: Seal sealer 1 6. > g 24. 2 o Oo 1 2 3 4 5 6 No. of Heads(GEENTLED Make a Histogram for the following distribution of marks. Class Boundaries [ Frequency 059.5, 2 95-195 10 195 —-295 5 29.5 395 6 39.5 —- 49.5 7 49.5 —- 59.5, 1 Since this is a continuous frequency distribution so we proceed as follows: (a) Mark the class boundaries along x-axis using a suitable scale, (b) Mark the frequency along y-axis using a suitable scale. (©) At each class interval construct a rectangle of height corresponding to the frequency of that group. Frequeney 05 95 195 295 395 495 59.5 Class Boundaries (Marks) Note: On graphs above 0 and -0.5 are written on positive side of x-axis just to better understand the histogram, Unequal Intervals Histogram If the class intervals are un-equal, the frequency must be adjusted by dividing each class frequency on its class interval size. If the interval becomes double, then frequency is divided by 2, so that the area of the bar is in proportion to the areas of other bars etc,GEEENLED Draw a histogram illustrating the following data: ‘Number of Men EGSRRee ‘As the class intervals are unequal the height of each rectangle cannot be made equal to the frequency. Therefore, we obtain proportional heights by dividing each frequency with class interval size. This is shown in the following table: Class. Proportional Interval (h)| FFEAVEREY | Heights 5 1 1+5=0.20 5 2 2+5=04 10, 26 26+10=26 5 22, 22+5=44 5 20, 20+5=40 5 1S 15+5=3.0 10 14 14+10=14 Y t Se Yu fall 5.2. ae “40 = 40 eat = 3.6: = 32 ae E28 26 5 24- —E 20- 2 16: 14 & 12 4 o2 04 o—++ >X 228 ¢ 333 3 Class-Boundaries6.1(iii) Construction of Frequency Polygon A Frequency Polygon is a many sided closed figure. Its construction is explained by the following example: For the following data make a Frequency Polygon. Class limits [Class Boundaries | Frequency 10-19 95—19.5) 10 20-29 19.5-29.5 5 30—39 29.5—39.5) 9 40—49 39.5—49.5 6 5059 495—59.5) 7 60-69 59.5—69.5 1 Step 1. Take two additional groups with the same class interval size. One before the very first group and the second after the very last group. Also calculate midpoints for these two groups, These groups will have frequency ‘0’ Class limits [Class Boundaries | Frequency. 0-9 ~0S—95 0 10—19 95—195 10 20—29 195295 5 30—39 295—39.5 9 40—49 39.5— 49.5, 6 50—59 495— 59.5 7 60— 69 595— 69.5 1 m—79 695 — 79.5 0 Step 2. Calculate class marks or midpoints for the given distribution, ‘Midpoints / Class marks ‘Frequency 45 0 145 10 24.5 5 345 9 445 6 545 7 645 1 74S o Step 3. Mark midpoints at x-axis and frequency along y-axis using appropriate scale. Step 4, Plot a point against the frequency for each of the corresponding midpoint/class mark.Step 5. Join all the points by means of line segments. 10. 4.5 14.5 24.5 34.5 44.5 54.5 64.5 74.5 Midpoints/Class Marks 6.2 Cumulative Frequency Distribution 6.2) Construction of Cumulative Frequency Table A table showing cumulative frequencies against upper class boundaries is called a cumulative frequency distribution. It is also called a less than cumulative frequency distribution. EBITD constructs cumulative frequency distribution forthe following data, Classes_| 20-24 | 25-29 | 30-34 | 35-39 | 40-44 | 45-49 | 50-54 Frequency [1 2 26 20 15 4 ‘The cumulative frequency distribution is constructed below: Class | Frequency | Cumulative Class ‘Cumulative Boundaries © Frequency Boundaries Frequency 10.5— 19.5 0 0 Less than 19.5 0 19.5— 24.5 1 O+1=1 Less than 24.5 1 24,5295 2 14253 Less than 29.5 3 29.5 — 345 26 3+26=29 | Less than 34.5 29 34.5— 395 22 29+22=51 | Less than 39.5 SI 395—44.5 20 51+20=71 | Less than 44.5 n 445—495 15 71+15=86 | Less than 49.5 86 49.5—54.5 14 86+14=100 | Less than $4.5 1006.2(ii) Drawing of Cumulative Frequency Polygon or Ogive A cumulative frequency polygon or ogive is a graph of less than cumulative frequency distribution. It involves the following steps: Step 1. Mark the class boundaries on x-axis and frequency (cumulative) on y-axis. Step 2. Plot the points for the given frequencies corresponding to the upper class boundaries. Step 3. Join the points by means of line segments. Step 4. Drop perpendicular from the last point to x-axis to make a closed figure. TTILED Construct a cumulative frequency polygon for the given data Class limits | Frequency 46 2 1-9 4 10—12 8 1315 3 First we add one group before the first group. Then we make the class boundaries and also calculate the cumulative frequencies. Class limits | Class Boundaries | Frequency | Cumulative frequency 1-3 05—35 0 0 46 35—65 2 0+2=2 we 65—95 4 24426 1012 9.5 —125 8 6+8=14 HIS 125—155, 3 1443517 Now we write the above frequency distribution in the form of Less than cumulative distribution as given below: Class Boundaries_| Cumulative frequency Less than 3.5 0 ‘Less than 6.5 2 Less than 9.5 6 Less than 12.5 14 Less than 15.5 7‘The Cumulative frequency polygon follows: Frequency 05 35 65 95 12S 155 Class Boundaries SSS 01:10) Oe The following data shows the number of members in various families. Construct frequency distribution, Also find cumulative frequencies. 9,11, 4,5,6.8,4,3,7,8, 5, 5,8.3,4,9, 12, 8,9, 10,6,7,7, 11,4,4,8,4,3,2,7,9, 10,9, 7, 6.9, 5,7. The following data has been obtained after weighing 40 students of class V. Make a frequency distribution taking class interval size as 5. Also find the class boundaries and midpoints, 34, 26, 33, 32, 24, 21, 37, 40, 41, 28, 28, 31, 33, 34, 37, 23, 27, 31, 31, 36, 29, 35, 36, 37, 38, 22, 27, 28, 29, 31, 35, 35, 40, 21, 32, 33, 27, 29, 30, 23. Also make a less than cumulative frequency distribution. (Hint: Make classes 2024, 2529...) From the following data representing the salaries of 30 teachers of a school Make a frequency distribution taking class interval size of Rs.100, 450, 500, 550, 580, 670, 1200,1150, 1120, 950, 1130, 1230, 890, 780, 760, 670, 880, 890, 1050, 980, 970, 1020, 1130, 1220, 760, 690, 710, 750, 1120, 760, 1240. (Hint: Make classes 450549, 550649, ‘The following data shows the daily load shedding duration in hours in 30 localities of a certain city. Make a frequency distribution of the load shedding duration taking 2 hours as class interval size and answer the following questions, 6, 12,5, 7, 8, 3, 6, 7, 10,2, 14, 11, 12, 8, 6, 8, 9, 7, 11, 6, 9, 12, 13, 10, 14, 7, 6, 10, 11, 14,12, (a) Find the most frequent load shedding hours?(b) Find the least load shedding intervals? (Hint: Make classes 2—3, 45, 6—7....). 5. Construct a Histogram and frequency Polygon for the following data showing weights of students in kg. Weights | Frequency /No. of students 20—24 5 25—29 8 30—34 13 35—39 22 4044 15 45—49 10 S0—S4 8 6.3 Measures of Central Tendency Introduction The purpose of frequency distribution and graphical techniques is to view, summarize and understand different aspects of data in a simple manner. But we are also interested to find a ‘representative’ of the data under study. In other words to determine a specific value of the variable around which the majority of the observations tend to concentrate. This representative shows the tendency or behavior of the distribution of the variable under study. This value is called average or the central value. The measures or techniques that are used to determine this central value are called Measures of Central Tendency. The following measures of central tendency will be discussed in this section: 1. Arithmetic mean 2. Median 3. Mode 4, Geometric mean 5. Harmonie mean 6 Quartiles All these measures are used under different situations depending upon the nature of the data. 6.3(i-a) Arithmetic Mean Arithmetic Mean (or simply called Mean) is a measure that determines a value (observation) of the variable under study by dividing the sum of all values (observations) of the variable by their number of observations. We denote Arithmetic mean by X . In symbols, we define: ‘DX _ Sum of all values of observation Arithmetic mean of n observations X= No of observation, Computation of Arithmetic Mean There are two types of data, ungrouped and grouped. We, therefore have different methods to determine Mean for the two types of data. These are explained with the help of examples.Ungrouped Data For ungrouped data we use three approaches to find mean. These are as follows. (® Direct Method (By Definition) ‘The formula under this method is given by: y__ 2X _Sumof all observations n ~ No. of observations (SESTIGED The marks of seven students in Mathematics are as follows, Calculate the Arithmetic Mean and interpret the result. StmdentNo [1 [2 [3 [4 [5 [6 (7 ‘Marks 6 lo [4 [ss [es [ae [a Let X= marks of a student SM Since the unit of data is marks, so the result is also in marks, Hence we may say that, ‘Each of the seven students obtains 59 marks on the average’. (ii) Indirect, Short Cut or Coding Methods ‘There are two approaches under Indirect Method. These are used to find mean when data set consists of large values or large number of values. The purpose is to simplify the computation of Mean. These approaches exist in theory but are not used in practice as many Statistical softwares are available now to handle large data. However a student should have knowledge of the two approaches. These are: (using an Assumed or Provisional mean (i) using a Provisional mean and changing scale of the variable Deviation is defined as difference of any value of the variable from any constant For example we say, Deviation from mean of X = (x) X. Deviation from any constant A= (x;~ A) = ‘The formulae used under indirect methods are: ye, Du Gi) = X¥=A+4t—xh fori= 12,0000 @ XX where D,=(X;—A),A is any assumed value of X called Assumed or Provisional mean, =A) “Ap” is the class interval size for unequal intervals.GEEETTED The salaries of five teachers are as follows. Find the mean salary using direct and indirect methods and compare the results. 11500, 12400, 15000, 14500, 14800. EMEP We proceed as follows: (@) Using Direct method 11500 + 12400 + 15000 + 14500 + 14800 5 = $2222- s60 Rapes. we assume A = 13000, D,=(x,-13000), h = 100 computations are shown in the following table: x , 13000) | x, 11500 12400 15000 14500 14800 Ex, = 68200 (@) Using Indirect methods X= 1300042222 13000 + 640 = 13640 Rupees 18 ¥u,= 32 (ii) Using Indirect method x =13000+ 22100 = 13640 Rupees Grouped Data ‘A data in the form of frequency distribution is called grouped data. For the grouped data we define formulae under Direct and Indirect methods as given below: (@)__ Using Direct method, (©) Using Indirect method, oar aP (i) Faas cys Lf where °X = 5 denotes the midpoint of a class or group if class intervals are given, and ‘his the class interval size Gi)(CREDITED Find the arithmetic mean using Direct method for the following frequency distribution, (Number of heads) X | Frequency 1 3 2 8 3 5 4 3 5 1 ‘We compute mean as follows: x £ [x 1 3 3 2 8 16. 3 5 15 4 3 12 5 1 5S Total zf=20 | ax=49 45 or 3 heads (since the variable is discrete). (CGEENNIED For the following data showing weights of toffee boxes in gms. Determine the ‘mean weight of boxes, Classes / Groups | Frequency 2 10END Fitst we calculate midpoints for each class and then find arithmetic mean. ‘Midpoints: x IK 45 145 24.5 34.5 445 545 64.5 Classes / Groups f Find arithmetic mean using short formulae taking X ‘mean in example 4 QEMIND We use the following formulae @ Fea t2 Gi) Xx ae eticn 2S LS Given A = 34.5, we note that the distribution has equal class interval size of 10. So ‘we may take f= 10 and make the following calculations: Miapoin's | p=x—345 |w=cx-ayto| sD fu 45 30 3 60 14.5 20 2 200 24.5 -10 -1 50 34.5 0 0 0 44.5 10 1 60 54.5 20 2 140, 14 64.5 30, 3 30 3 Substituting the totals in the above formulae, we get -80 X=345+—— =345-2=325 emwo F=315+Bxt0 =345-2= 2.5 em. Hence the three methods yield the same answer. 6.3) (b) Median Median is the middle most observation in an arranged data set. It divides the data set into two equal parts. “Z’ is used to represent median, We determine Median by using the following formulae: ‘Ungrouped data ‘Case-1: When the number of observations is odd of a set of data arranged in order ‘of magnitude the median (middle most observation ) is located by the formula given below: = ‘n+ wet) Case-2: When the number of observations is even of a set of data arranged in order of magnitude the median is the arithmetic mean of the two middle observations. That is, th observation ‘median is average of 5 and G + 1) values. x 5 [size of (Gu +t? 4) ebservations | On S term tests in mathematics, a student has made marks of 82, 93, 86, 92 and 779. Find the median for the marks. By arranging the grades in ascending order, the arranged data is 79, 82, 86, 92 , 93 Since number of observations is odd ie., n= 5. K=size of & th observation X = size of 3" observation X=86 GEILE The sugar contents for a random sample of 6 packs of juices of a certain brand ‘are found to be 2.3, 2.7, 2.5, 2.9, 3.1 and 1.9 milligram. Find the median, Arrange the values by increasing order of magnitude 19,23,25,27,29,31 Since number of observations is even ie., 6. Feb faneor(S$o+£$2) sero] 1 [size of (3 + 4") observations] $427 2 66 milligram,Grouped Data (Discrete) ‘The following steps are involved in determining median for grouped data(discrete): > Make cumulative frequency column. > Determine the median observation using cumulative frequency, ic., the class containing 6) observation. Find median for the following frequency distribution, (Number of heads) X | Frequency 1 3 2 8 3 3 4 3 5 1 We first make cumulative frequency column as given below: %__[ Frequency | Cumulative frequency 1 3 3 2 3 i 3 5 16 4 3 19 5 1 20 Toul 320 Now ‘* Median = the class containing 8 observation ao." Median =the class containing (2p) observation Median = the class containing (10)"* observation Median = Grouped Data (Continuous) ‘The following steps are involved in determining median for grouped data (continuous): > Determine class boundaries > Make cumulative frequency column % Determine the median class using cumulative frequency, ie., the class a containing @) observation. y Use the formula, ‘Median =1 fe 4+ lower class boundary of the median class, + class interval size of the median class, : frequency of the median class, cumulative frequency of the class preceding the median class. The following data is the time taken by 40 students to solve a problem is| recorded. Find the median time taken by the students. 138 [ 164 [150 [132 | 144 [125 [149 [157 146 [158 | 140 [147 [136 [148 [152 [144 168 [126 [138 [176 |_163 [119 [isa | 165 146 [173 [142 (147 | 135 [153 [140 [135 161 | 145 | 135 | 142 | 150 [156 [145 | 128 Glass Intervals | Frequency | Class | Cumulative Boundaries _| Frequency | 118 3 1175-1265 3 127 5 1265 - 135.5 8 136 9 135.5 1445 17 145 12 144.5 153.5 29 __| Median class 154-162 5 153.5 — 162.5 34 163 4 162.5- 171.5 8 17 2 171.5 180.5 40 =40 = = Now o median class 3) observation 40)" aw median class = class containing <) 20" observation median class = 144.5 ~ 153.5 = lower class boundary of median class = 144.5, ¢ = cumulative frequency preceding the median class = 17 f= frequency of median class = 12 +h = size of median class interval h(n 9 (G-c}=1445 + 0-17) = 1468 So, 6.3(8) (©) Mode Mode is defined as the most frequent occurring observation in the data, It is the’ observation that occurs maximum number of times in given data. The following formula is used to determine Mode:Ungrouped data and Discrete Grouped data ‘Mode = the most frequent observation Grouped Data (Continuous) The following steps are involved in determining mode for grouped data: > Find the group that has the maximum frequency. > Use the formula wi + lower class boundary of the modal class or group, h class interval size of the modal class, tr frequency of the modal class, Ff, + frequency of the class preceding the modal class and 5 frequency of the class succeeding the modal class. Find the modal size of shoe for the following data: 4, P 5,6, 6,6,7,7.5, 75, 8, 8,8, 6,5, 6.5, 7 GENIN We note the most occurring observation in the given data and find that, mode = 6. Find Mode for the following frequency distribution, (Number of heads) X_[ Frequency i 3 2 8 3 5 4 3 3 I QED Since the given data is discrete grouped data so that, mode = 2, (Since for X number of times ie .8) For the following data showing weights of toffee boxes in gm. Determine the ‘modal weight of boxes, the frequency is maximum, means 2 heads appear the maximum. Classes/Groups | Frequency 0-9 2 10-—19 10. 20 -— 29) 5 30-— 39) 9 40 -— 49 6 50-— 59 7 (60 —— 69 1QTD Since the data is continuous so we proceed as follows: (@) Determine the class boundaries first, (b)___ Find the class with maximum frequency Classes/Groups | Class Boundaries_| Frequency o-—9 ~05 — 95 2 9.5 ——- 19.5 Modal class 19.5 — 295 295 — 39.5 39.5 — 49.5 495 — 595 59.5 — 695 From the above table we get, modal class or group = 9.5 — 19.5. fy =10,1=95,h =10, f,=2and f, =5. 10 =2 Mode =95 +349) —5*10 dote=951 8829546134 15654 gm 6.3(i) (d) Geometric Mean Geometric mean of a variable X is the n” positive root of the product of the My Xyyocnen%y Observations. In symbols, we write GM. = 05.445 4)" The above formula can also be written by using logarithm, For Ungrouped data log X GM. = Anti log (2x) For Grouped data GM. = Anti log Fee) GEEDNIED Find the geometric mean of the observations 2, 4, 8 using (i) basic formula and| (Gi) using logarithmic formula.(@ Using basic formula GM=(2x4x8)4 = 64)! =4. x log X 2 03010 4 0.6021 8 0.9031 Total | Zlog X= 1.8062 GM. = Anti log (2) = Anti log (0.6021) = 4.00003 = 4 Find the geometric mean for the following data: ‘Marks in percentage | Frequency/ (No of Students) 33-— 40 28 41-—50 31 51-60 12 61-70 1-75 We proceed as follows: f x log X flog X 28 365 | 1562293 43,7442 31 455_| 1.658011 5139835, 12 555 | 1.744293 20.93152 9 635_| 1816241 1634617 5 73_| 1.863323 9.316614 f= 85 Bflog X= 141.7369 GM = Anti log eee = Anti log (1.66749) = 46.50 % marks 6.3(i) (e) Harmonic Mean Harmonic mean refers to the value obtained by reciprocating the mean of the reciprocal of 3, Xy,-0ene%, Observations. In symbols, for ungrouped data, HM.and for grouped data, HM.=—> X For the following data find the Harmonic mean. x[e[slTs[s x Ux. 12 [0.0833 5 02 8 0135 4 0.25 Total | 0.6583 Classes No. of Students 28 31 s1— 60 2 61-70 3 un 75 3 £ x 1X. 28 365 0.767123 31 455 0.681319 12 35.5 0.216216 9 655 0.137405 5 B 0.068493 Bf 85 zfs 1.870556 8s Hi = p> Tarag= 1541 x 6.3(ii) Properties of Arithmetic Mean (Mean of a variable with similar observations say constant k is the constant k itself. (i) Mean is affected by change in origin.(ii) Mean is affected by change in scale. (iv) Sum of the deviations of the variable X from its mean is always zero. (EEDDIEEE Find the mean of observations: 34, 34, 34, 34,34, 34. Since the variable say X here is taking same observation so by property (i) X=34. GETED A variable X takes the following values 4, 5, 8, 6, 2. Find the mean of X. Also find the mean when (a) 5 is added to each observation (b) 10 is multiplied with each observation (c) Prove sum of the deviation from mean is zero, GUM Given the values of X, xX 4 5 8 6 2 We may introduce two new variables Y and Z under (a) and (b) respectively. So we are given that (a) ¥ =X-+ 5 (b) Z= 10X. The following table shows the desired result: x ¥=X+5 | Z=10X xX-X 4 9 40 = 5 10 50 oO 8 13 80 6 i 60 1 2 7 20 =3 Total | Ex=25 | zy=50 | Ez=250 | )(X-X)=0 From the above table we get, x23 Wenote that (a) ¥=10=5+5=X+5 (b) — Z=50= 10(5)=10X Which shows that mean is affected by change in origin and scale. (©) From the last column of the table we note that ))(X — X)=0 , the sum of the deviations from mean is zero. 6.3 (iii) Calculation of Weighted Mean and Moving Averages a. The Weighted Arithmetic Mean The relative importance of a number is called its weight. When numbers x, X3, .%, are not equally important, we associate them with certain weights, Ww), Wa, Wy. Wy depending on the importance or significance. Wy RLF Wy yt + Weky Ewe witwytotw, ~ Ew is called the weighted arithmetic mean,EDTLED The following table gives the monthly earnings and the number of workers in a Factory, compute the weighted average. No. of employees ‘Monthly earnings. Rs. 4 800 2 45 20 100 30 30 80 35 300 15 GENIN Number of employees are treated as a weight (w) and monthly earnings as variable (x) ‘No. of employees (») | Monthly earning in Rs. (x) (ew) 4 800 3200 2 45 990 20 100 2000 30 30 900 80 35 2800 300 15 4500 w= 456 Baw = 14390 Eew w= Sy b. Moving Averages Moving averages are defined as the successive averages (arithmetic means) which are computed for a sequence of days/months/years at a time. If we want to find 3-days moving average, we find the average of first 3-cays, then dropping the first day and add the succeeding day to this group. Place the average of each 3-days against the mid of 3-days. This process continues until all the days, beginning from first to the last, are exhausted. Calculate three days moving average for the following record of attendance: Week [ Sun [ Mon | Tue [Wed | Thu [ Fri | Sat a | 24 [ss [28 [as [si [sa | 00 Week and 3-day it Days Attendance = Total Average ‘Sun. 24 _ _— Mon, 5S 107 107/3 = 35.67 Tue. 28 128 128/3 = 42.67 Wed. 45 124 124/3 = 41.33, Thu. SI 150 150/3 = 50.00 Fri, 4 165 165/3 = 55.00 Sat, 60 = =By adding the first three values, we get 107, which is placed at the center of these values i.e,, Monday and then dropping the first observation i.e,, 24 and adding the next 3 values, we get 128 and placed at the middle of these three values and so on. For average values, divide 3 days moving total by “3” which shows in last column of the table. 6.3(iv) Graphical Location of Median, Quartiles and Mode ‘We explain the graphical location of Median, Quartiles and Mode by the help of following examples: For the following distribution, locate Median and Quartiles on graph: ‘Class Boundaries | Cumulative frequency Less than 120 0 Less than 130 12 Less than 140 21 Less than 150 SI Less than 160 64. Less than 170 7 Less than 180 76 Less than 190 80, Less than 200 82 We locate Median and Quartiles by using the following cumulative frequency polygon, Seale ‘X-avis smal scale= 10 “Yeanis:S smal eles = L Se233s Tso [iso Ts 80190 ao 5, | ~ieaen Finding Q: a) Find (n/4)" observation which is 82/4=20.5. b) On the graph locate 20.5 on y-axis and draw a horizontal line segment parallel to x-axis touching the polygon.c) Draw vertical line segment from this point touching x-axis. d) Read the value of first quartile at the point where the line segment meets x-axis which is 135.17. Finding Q, or Median : a) Find 2("/4)* observation which is 2(82/4)=41 b) On the graph locate 41 on y-axis and draw a horizontal line segment parallel to x-axis touching the polygon. ©) Draw a vertical line segment from this point touching x-axis. d) Read the value of Median at the point where the line segment meets x-axis which is 145.33, Finding Q a) Find 3(n/4)" observation which is 3(82/4)=61.5. b) On the graph locate 61.5 on y-axis and draw a horizontal line segment parallel to x-axis touching the polygon. ) _ Drawa vertical line segment from this point touching x-axis. 4) Read the value of Median at the point where the line segment meets x-axis which is 157.57, For the following distribution locate Mode on graph. Salaries in Rupees No. of teachers 120 — 130 12 130 — 140) 15 140 — 150, 4 150 — 160] B 160 — 170) 7 170 — 180 5 180 — 190) 4 190 — 200 2‘On Histogram the mode is located on X-axis as shown below: Steps: 25. ‘Histogram’ 20 Sele XeaxiLamallszale~ 10 > ‘eaux: 2 smal ele = 1 2 15. g = 10 5 oO Tad 1) 0 [150 16 170 150190200 Che Bounds (Wodet-14400) > Determine the rectangle having the highest peak indicating the modal class. > Draw a line segment from the top left comer of the rectangle to the top left commer of the succeeding rectangle, > Draw another line segment from the top right comer of the rectangle to the top right comer of the preceding rectangle. > Drop perpendicular from the top of the rectangle to the x-axis passing through the point of intersection of the two line segments. Read the value at the point where the perpendicular meets the x-axis. This is the Mode of the data which is 144. SS") Te Sore ‘What do you understand by measures of central tendency. v Define Arithmetic mean, Geometric mean, Harmonic mean, mode and median Find arithmetic mean by direct method for the following set of data: (@ 12,14, 17, 20, 24, 29, 35, 45. Gi) 200, 225, 350, 375, 270, 320, 290. For each of the data in Q. no 3., compute arithmetic mean using indirect method. Basic StatisticsThe marks obtained by students of class XI in mathematics are given below. ‘Compute arithmetic mean by direct and indirect methods. Classes/ Groups [ Frequency | =) 2 10—19 10 20—29 5 3039 3 4029 6 50—S9 7 09 i ‘The following data relates to the ages of children in a school. Compute the mean age by direct and short-cut method taking any provisional mean. (Hint. Take A = 8) Class limits [Frequency 6 10, = 20 10-12 13 B15 7 Total 50 Also Compute Geometric mean and Harmonic mean. The following data shows the number of children in various families. Find mode and median. 9, 11,4, 5, 6,8, 4,3, 7, 8,5, 5,8, 3,4,9, 12, 8,9, 10, 6,7, 7, 11,4,4,8,4,3,2,7,9, 10,9, 7, 6.9.5. Find Modal number of heads for the following distribution showing the number of heads when 5 coins are tossed. Also determine median. X (number of heads) | Frequency (number of times) 3The following frequency distribution the weights of boys in kilogram. Compute mean, median, mode. Class Intervals | Frequency 13 2 46 3 9 5 1012 4 15-15 6 1618 2 1921 1 10. A student obtained the following marks at a certain examination: English 73, Urdu. 82, Mathematics 80, History 67 and Science 62. (If the weights accorded these marks are 4, 3, 3, 2 and 2, respectively, what is an appropriate average mark? (i) Whatis the average mark if equal weights are used? 11. Ona vacation trip a family bought 21.3 liters of petrol at 39.90 rupees per liter, 18.7 liters at 42.90 rupees per liter, and 23.5 liters at 40.90 rupees per liter. Find the mean price paid per liter. 12, Calculate simple moving average of 3 years from the following data: [ears [2001]2002[2003|2004]2005]2006] 2007] 2008 [2009 [2010] [Yalues| 102 | 108 [ 130 | 140 | 158 | 180 | 196 | 210 | 220 | 230 13. Determine graphically for the following data and check your answer by using formulae, (Median and Quartile using cumulative frequency polygon. Gi) Mode using Histogram, Class Boundaries 10—20 20-30 30—40 40-30 5060. 60—70 6.4 Measures of Dispersion Statistically, Dispersion means the spread or scatterness of observations in a data set. ‘The spread or scatterness in a data set can be seen in two ways: (@ The spread between two extreme observations in a data set. (ii) The spread of observations around an average say their arithmetic mean, lalallala i‘The purpose of finding Dispersion is to study the behavior of each unit of population around the average value, This also helps in comparing two sets of data in more detail The measures that are used to determine the degree ot extent of variation in a data set are called Measures of Dispersion. ‘We shall discuss only some important absolute measures of dispersion now. @ Range Range measures the extent of variation between two extreme observations of a data set, Itis given by the formula Range = Xa — Xin =X —Xo where X,,.. =X,, : the maximum, highest or largest observation. Xun = ‘The formula to find range for grouped continuous data is given below: Range = (Upper class boundary of last group)-(lower class boundary of first group Find Range for the following weights of students 110, 109, 84, 89, 77, 104, 74, 97, 49, 59, 103, 62. GUMIND Given that X,,= 110, X, = 49, Range = 110-49 =61 Find the Range forthe following distribution, ‘the minimum ,lowest or smallest observation. Glasses / Groups f 1o—19 10 20—29 7 30—39 9 40— 49 6 50—59 7 60 —69 1 Total 40 (QS We find class boundaries and class marks for the given data as follows: Class limits | Class Boundaries |_ Frequency 10—19 95—19.5 10 20— 29 19.5295 7 30— 39 29.5—39.5, 9 40—49 39.5—49.5) 6 50— 59) 49.5—59,5 7 60— 69 59.5—69.5, 1 =40 Range = 69.5 - 9.5 = 60 (i) Variance Variance is defined as the mean of the squared deviations of x; (i = 1, 2, ..... m) observations from their arithmetic mean. In symbols,D(xxy ‘Variance of X= Var (X) =. (iii) Standard Deviation Standard deviation is defined as the positive square root of mean of the squared deviations of X; (i = 1, 2, ....., n) observations from their arithmetic mean. In symbols we write, Standard Deviation of X = $.D(X)= Computation of Variance and Standard Deviation We use the following formulae to compute Variance and Standard Deviation for Ungrouped and Grouped Data. Ungrouped Data ‘The formula of Variance is given by: mx" (Ix) n n Var 0) and Standard deviation SD [SEMTSTED The marks of six students in Mathematics are as follows. Determine Variance and Standard deviation. StudentNo | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4] 5 [| 6 ‘Marks 6o | 70 | 30 | 90 | 80 | 42 QVM Let X = marks of a student, We make the following computations for finding ‘Variance and Standard deviation. x x? x-¥ (xy 60 3600. 2. 4 70 4900 8 64 30 900) =32 024 90 8100 28 784 80, 6400 18 324 42 1764 20 400 2X = 372 | Ex?=25664 | ¥(x-X)=0 | E(X- X= 2600 So, x 2 = 62 marks and Var (X) 2500, = 433.3333 (square marks)‘Using computational formula 25664 (2) Var (X) = $2 = POOF _ (37? ‘ar (X) 6 6 = 427.3333 - 38: S.D (X) = S =-4277.3333 — 3844 = 20.81666 Marks Grouped Data 433.3333 (square marks) (433.3333 The formula of Variance is given by: Ee ee . zs =f and standard deviation Pe] For the following data showing weights of toffee boxes in gm. determine the variance and standard deviation by using direct methods, X (gm) f 45 2 145 10 245; 3 345 9 445 6 345 7 645 1 We make the following computations x | ¢ |x-x SE fe 45 [2 | 28 784 9 405 145 | 10 | -18 324 145 2102.5 ms|[s | -8 64 320 1225 3001.25 sas[9 [2 4 36 3105 10712.25 aslo | 2 144 864 267 118815 sas [7 | 2 484 3388, 3815 20791.75 was [a | 32 1024 1024 45 4160.25 BF (X- X= 10440 2X? = 52690‘Using definitional formula 10440 §?= = 261 sq. gm. 40 2 Using computational formula we get, 52690 _ e 300) 8749 — a0) qo _) =1317.25 — (32.5)2 = 1317.25 — 1056.25 = 261 sq. gm., and standard deviation is given by, S= soe (261 = 16.155 em. 52690 _ (1300) =P’ (EOP) = ype = 16.155 40 ( 40 ) = Compare the variation about mean for the two groups of students who obtained the following marks in Statistics X= Marks (section A) | ¥ = Marks section B 60 62 70 62 30 65 90 8 80 67 40 48 QHMMMD In order to compare variation about mean we compute standard deviation for the ‘two groups as follows: x y x-¥ (x-%) | y-7 | (v-7y 60 2. 2 4 0 70 62 8 64 0 30 9 90 36 80 25 40 196 EX = 370 Ly- Y= 266 Mean for group A Mean for group=i SDO)= 4 ECR) a = V433.333 = 20.82 Marks a SD(Y)= paLaae Pee = 44.333 = 6.66 Marks n ‘Comment: We note that the variation in Group B is smaller than that of Group A. This implies that the marks of students in Group B are closer to theit Mean than that of Group A. = Ere = What do you understand by Dispersion? How do you define measures of dispersion? Define Range, Standard deviation and Variance. ‘The salaries of five teachers in Rupees are as follows. 11500, 12400, 15000, 14500, 14800. Find Range and standard deviation. 5, a Find the standard deviation “S” of each set of numbers: @ — 12,6,7,3, 15, 10, 18,5 (i) 9,3,8,8,9,8,9, 18. b- Calculate variance for the data: 10, 8, 9, 7, 5, 12, 8, 6, 8, 2 6, The length of 32 items are given below. Find the mean length and standard deviation of the distribution. ‘Length 20-22 | 23-25 | 26-28 | 29-31 | 32-34 Frequency 3 6 Rm [9 2 7, For the following distribution of marks calculate Range. ee Frequeney/ (No of Students) 31—40 28 41—50 31 51—60 12, 61—70 15@ @) © i) (i) div) w) wi) (vii) vii) @ &) i) (xii) MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES Multiple Choice Questions Three possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (7) the correct answer. A grouped frequency table is also called data _(b) frequency distribution frequency polygon A histogram is a set of adjacent (a) squares (b) rectangles (©) circles ‘A frequency polygon is a many sided (a) closed figure (b) rectangle (©) square A cumulative frequency table is also called (a) frequency distribution (b) data (©) _ less than cumulative frequency distribution In a cumulative frequency polygon frequencies are plotted against (a) midpoints (b) upper class boundaries (©) class limits Arithmetic mean is a measure that determines a value of the variable under study by dividing the sum of all values of the variable by their (@) number (b) group (©) denominator A Deviation is defined as a difference of any value of the variable from a (@) constant (b) histogram (©) sum ‘A data in the form of frequency distribution is called (a) Grouped data (b) Ungrouped data (©) Histogram Mean of a variable with similar observations say constant k is (a) negative (©) itself (©) zero Mean is affected by change in (@) value (b) ratio (©) origin Mean is affected by change in (a) place (b) scale (©) rate ‘Sum of the deviations of the variable X from its mean is always (a) zero () one (©) same(xiv) (xv) (xvi) (xvii) (xviii) (xix) (xx), (xxi) (xxii) ‘The n™ positive root of the product of the %,,x,,%,, (a) Mode (b) Mean © — Geometric mean ‘The value obtained by reciprocating the mean of the reciprocal of 25M, pees, Observations is called (a) Geometric mean (6) Median (©) Harmonic mean ‘The most frequent occurring observation in a data set is called (a) mode (b) median (©) harmonic mean ‘The measure which determines the middlemost observation in a data set is called , observations is called (a) median (b) mode (©) mean ‘The observations that divide a data set into four equal parts are called (a) deciles (b) quartiles (©) percentiles ‘The spread or scatterness of observations in a data set is called (a) average (b) dispersion (©) central tendency ‘The measures that ate used to determine the degree or extent of variation in a data set are called measures of (a) dispersion (b) central tendency (©) average ‘The extent of variation between two extreme observations of a data set is measured by (@) average (b) range © quartiles ‘The mean of the squared deviations of x, (i = 1, 2,.....n) observations from their arithmetic mean is called (a) variance (b) standard deviation (©) range ‘The positive square root of mean of the squared deviations of X; (i= 1, 2, .....m) observations from their arithmetic mean is called (a) harmonic mean (b) range (c) standard deviation Write short answers of the following questions. Define class limits Define class mark. ‘What is cumulative frequency? Define a frequency distribution, What is a Histogram?(ix) @ (xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) ‘Name two measures of central tendency. Define Arithmetic mean. Write three properties of Arithmetic mean, Define Median. Define Mode? What do you mean by Harmonic mean? Define Geometric mean What is Range? Define Standard deviation, ——] SUMMARY => Range is the difference between maximum and minimum observation. The minimum and the maximum values defined for a class or group are called class limits. The total of frequency up to an upper class limit or boundary is called the cumulative frequency. A frequency distribution is a tabular arrangement classifying data into different groups. A Histogram is a graph of adjacent rectangles constructed on X¥-plane. A cumulative frequency polygon or ogive is a graph of less than cumulative frequency distribution Arithmetic mean is a measure that determines a value of the variable under study by dividing the sum of all values of the variable by their number. A Deviation is defined as ‘a difference of any value of the variable from any constant’. D, = x,- A. Geometric mean of a variable X is the n® positive root of the product of the A RyByponcony hy observations, Harmonic mean refers to the value obtained by reciprocating the mean of the reciprocal of %,)%,,%yy.cnnn%, observations ‘Mode is defined as the most frequent occurring observation of the variable or data, Median is the measure which determines the middlemost observation in a data set. Statistically, Dispersion means the spread or scatterness of observations in a data set, Range measures the extent of variation between two extreme observations of a data set. Variance is defined as the mean of the squared deviations of x, (7 = 1, 2,-1.0. 1) observations from their arithmetic mean, Standard deviation is defined as the positive square root of mean of the squared deviations of x, (i= 1, 2, ......m) observations from their arithmetic mean,[a eee eel er ae eal ene _—_ ee eel mel —Eiw In this unit, students will learn how to 2 measure an angle in degree, minute and second. 2 convert an angle given in degrees, minutes and seconds into decimal form and vice versa. 2 define a radian (measure of an angle in circular system) and prove the relationship between radians and degrees. 2% establish the rule 1 =r where r is the radius of the circle, | the length of circular arc and Othe central angle measured in radians. i & prove that the area of a sector of a circle is 57°8 a define and identify: ¢- general angle (coterminal angles), ¢- angle in standard position. a recognize quadrants and quadrantal angles. a define trigonometric ratios and their reciprocals with the help of a unit circle. a recall the values of trigonometric ratios for 45°, 30°, 60°. & recognise signs of trigonometric ratios in different quadrants. & find values of remaining trigonometric ratios if one trigonometric ratio is given. 2 calculate the values of trigonometric ratios for 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360°. & prove the trigonometric identities and apply them to show different trigonometric relations. & find angle of elevation and depression. a solve real life problems involving angle of elevation and depression. i)7A Measurement of an Angle An angle is defined as the union of two non-collinear rays with some common end point. The rays are called arms of the angle and the common end point is known as vertex of the angle. ILis easy if we make an angle by rotating a ray from one position to another. When. we form an angle in this way, the original position of the ray is called initial side and final position of the ray is called the terminal side of the angle. If the rotation of the ray is anti- clockwise or clockwise, the angle has positive or negative measure respectively. clockwise rotation negative measure Initial side Initial side anti-clockwise rotation positive measure Fig. 7.1 7.1) Measurement of an angle in sexagesimal system (degree, minute and second) Degree: We divide the circumference of a circle into 360 equal arcs, The angle subtended a the centre ofthe cree by one aris called one degree and is denoted by 1°. y off The symbols 1°, 1” and 1” are used to denote a degree, a minute and a second respectively. Thus 60 seconds (60") make one minute (1’) 660 minutes (60°) make one degree (1°) 90 degrees (90°) make one right angle 360 degrees (360°) make 4 right angles An angle of 360° denotes a complete circle or one revolution. We use coordinate system (o locate any angle to a standard position, where its initial side is the positive x-axis and its vertex is the origin.THD Locate (a) -45°.() 120° (©) 45° MED The angles are shown in Figure 7 12 (d)-270° y) 270° Terminal side © i @ Figure 7.1.2 7.AGi) Conversion of an angle given in D” M’S “form into decimal form and vice versa The conversion is explained through examples. (FENTTSH 4) — Convert 25°30" to decimal degrees. (ii) Convert 32.25° to D® M’S “form. 25°30" = 25° (2) =a 05° = 255° @ 25°30" = 25°+ (Zp) = 25° +0.5°= 25.5) 0 = 39° 4.0.25° = 39° + (25) (ii) 32.25° = 32° + 0.25° = 32° +@) 304s 2° + (4x 60) = 32°15 HRDTLED convert 1292835” to decimal degres correct to three decimal places. y 795" = 12° 4 2 yo, 23° 35° MMM 17938" = 1 22, IS = (10e E 3E) = 12° 40,3833" + 0.00972"= 12,3930° = 12.393° GEEENIED Convert 45.36° to D’ M’S “form. (45.36)° = 45° + (0.36)° = 45° + 21.67 = 45° +21’ + (0.6 x 60)” = 45°21'36" 7.1Gii) Radian measure of an angle (circular system). Another system of measurement of an angle known as circular system is of most importance and is used in all the higher branches of Mathematics, Radian: The angle subtended at the centre of the P circle by an arc, whose length is equal to the radius of the circle is called one Radian. Consider a circle of radius r whose centre is 0. From any point A on the circle cut off an arc AP 4 whose length is equal to the radius of the circle, Toin © with A and O with P. The ZAOP is one radian. This means that when length of arc AP = length of radius OA then mZ AOP = | radian Fig. 7.13 Relationship between radians and degrees We know that circumference of a circle is Me 2nr where r is the radius of the circle. Since 2 2n radians circle is an are whose length is 2nr, The radian ‘measure of an angle that form a complete circle is 2nr From this, we sce that 360° = 2m radians Bene > or 180° =mradians @ Using this relation, we can convert degrees into radians and radians into degrees as follows: 180°= radians => 1° =7g5 radian , Fig. 71.4 wax. Pax &) radian Gi) radian = ce) » yradian = y ce) degrees‘Some special angles in degree and radians. 180° = 1 (180°) = m radians 90° = 5 (180°) =5 radians 1 60° = 5 (180°) = radians = 1 (180% = radians 1 45° = 30° =§ (180°) = F radians 20° 3 radians Ms Fig. 7.1.5 EDTTED conver the following angles into radian measur: (a) 15° (b) 124°22" COMB (a) 15°= 15 (7% rads by using @ 180 = =] adians 3 270° = 5 (180°) , 2) 4.) (b) 124922’ = (124 +60, (124.3666) &® radians = 2.171 radians (CRENTIEED Express the following into degree. (a) radians (0) 6.1 radians @ radians = (2) degrees = 120° (©) 61 radians = 6.1) ("22) degrees = 6.1 (57295779) = 349.5043 degrees Remember that: (180). ee ee eas lone 7 1 radian = (51503) = 57.295795° = S7°1745”, 1° ==]45° = 0.0175 radians=—) EXERCISE 7.1 = 1. Locate the following angles: @ 30° 23° Gi 13° Gy 228° (w) -60° (vi) 120° (vit) -150° (viii) -225° 2. Express the following sexagesimal measures of angles in decimal form. ( 45°30" Gi) 60°30°30" Gil) 125°22'50” 3. Express the following into D® M’ S” form. ()4736° Gi) 125.45% iit) 225.75" iv) 22.5" (v) ~67.58° (vi) 315.18° 4. Express the following angles into radians (30° Gi) (60 GH) 135° vy 225°) -150° (vi) 225" (vii) 300° (viii) 315° 5. Convert each of following to degrees. 3n Sn Tk 13 oF we ine wie 3 In 1B wn 4s C= it) - 75" 7.2 Sector of a Circle (A partof the circumference of a circle is called an are. (ii) part of the circle bounded by an arc and a chord is called segment of a circle, Gil) A part of the circle bounded by the two radii and an are is called sector of the circle A B an are a segment a sector 7.2) To establish the rule / = r @ where r is the radius of the circle, / the length of circular arc and the central angle measured in radians. Let an are AB denoted by 1 subtends an angle 8 radian at the centre of the circle. It is a fact of plane geometry that measure of central angles of the ares of a circle are proportional to the lengths of their ares.r (HEMNIEEDD In a circle of radius 10m, (a) find the length of an arc intercepted by a central angle of 1.6 radian, (B) find the length of an arc intercepted by a central angle of 60°, UMM (a) Here | = 1.6 radian , r= 10m and Since I=r@ = 1=10x16=16m () 0= 60° = 60 x7g5= 5 rad lon f=r=10x3=73"m. Find the distance travelled by a cyclist moving on a circle of radius 15m, if he. makes 3.5 revolutions, (GEN 1 revolution = 27 radians 3.5 revolution = 2n x 3.5 m Distance traveled = =r 8 5.x 2x 3.5 = 105m 7.2Gi) Area of a circular sector Consider a circle of radius r units and an are of length / units, subtends an angle @ at 0. ‘Area of the circle = nr? Angle of the circle = 2 Angle of the sector = @ radian ‘Then by elementary geometry we can use the proportion, area of sector ABP _ angle of the sector area of circle ~ angle of the circle area of sector AOBP 6Find area of the sector of a circle of radius ‘16cm if the angle at the centre is 60°. SEMEN Area of sector =F 78 me Now O= 60° x Tag = 3 tad sr 16cm, 1 3 ‘Area of sector = 5 (16)? 6) 1 22 7 (256) x ) 134.1 em? —— EXERCISE 7.2 ¢— 1. Find 4, when: @1=20m , r=3.5em (ii) = 4.5m, r= 2.5m 2. Find J, when: (i) = 180°, r= 4.9m (ii) 0= 60°30" , r= 15mm 3. Find r, when: t radian (ii) 1= 52cm, 0 = 45° 4, Ina circle of radius 12m, find the length of an arc which subtends a central angle = 1.5 radian, 5. Inaccitcle of radius 10m, find the distance travelled by a point moving on this circle if the point makes 3.5 revolution, 3.5 revolution = Tn), 6 What is the circular measure of the angle between the hands of the watch at 3 o'clock? 7. Whatis the length of the arc APB? 8 p 4 8. Imacircle of radius 12cm, how long an arc subtends a central angle of 84°. 9. Find the area of the sectors OPR. R Fe R @ u wy oD 'O 20cm PFind area of the sector inside a central angle of 20° in a circle of radius 7m. ‘Schar is making a skirt, Each panel of this skit is of the shape shown shaded in the diagram, How much material (cloth) is required for each panel? 12, Find the area of the sector with central angle of § radian in a circle of radius 10em. 13, The area of the sector with a central angle @ in a circle of radius 2m is 10 square ‘meter. Find din radians. 7.3 Trigonometric Ratios 7.3(i-a) General Angles (Coterminal angles) An angle is indicated by a curved arrow that shows the direction of rotation from initial to the terminal side, Two or mote than two angles may have the same initial and terminal sides. Consider an angle ZAOB with OA as initial side and OB as terminal side with vertex 0. Let m ZAOB = @radian, where 0< @5 2n. B B 8 A 2+ 4+ o A A 4 @ (i) (iii) If the terminal side “OB comes to its original position after, one, two or more than two complete revolutions in the anti-clockwise direction, then mZAOB in above three cases will be @ — O rad after zero revolution Gi) n+ Orad, after one revolution Gi) r+ Ord, after two revolutions Coterminal Angles: Two or more than two angles with the same initial and terminal sides are called coterminal angles. It means that terminal side comes to its original position after every revolution of 2x. radian in anti= clockwise or clockwise direction. In general, if Bis in degrees, then 360° + 8, where k€ Z, is an angle coterminal with @ If angle @is in radian measure, then 2kn + 6 where k€ Z, is an angle coterminal with 6. ‘Thus, the general angle = 2(k) n+ 8, where ke Z.Se ame = angles are coterminal with 120°? QAM -240° is conterminal with 120° as their terminal side is same 480° = 360° + 120°, the angle 480° terminates at 120° after one complete revolution. nw an + 2Z = 720°+ 120° the angle “Fis coterminal with 120°, aide =n Sys an + Zh = -720° - 120° som Fis not coterminal with 120° 7.3(i-b) Angle in Standard Position A general angle is said to be in standard position if its vertex is at the origin and its, initial side is directed along the positive direction of the x-axis of a rectangular coordinate system, Because all the angles in standard position have the same initial side, the location of the terminal side is of importance. The position of the terminal side of an angle in standard position remains the same if measure of the angle is increased or decreased by a multiple of On, Some standard angles are shown in the following figures: y et pte Fig. 73.1 (a) Locate each angle in standard position, i) 240° i) 490° iit) -270° QUMMEED The angles are shown in Figure 7.3.1 (b) Zoot 0" Poor 0 270° p70" 490° = 360° + 130" @ “ ii) Fig. 73.1 (b)7.3Gi) ‘The Quadrants and Quadrantal Angles ‘The x-axis and y-axis divides the plane in four regions, called quadrants, when they intersect each other at right angle, The point of intersection is called origin and is denoted by 0. ‘Angles between 0° and 90° are in the first quadrant. ‘Angles between 90° and 180° are in the second quadrant. ‘Angles between 180° and 270° are in the third quadrant. Quadrant | Quadrant ‘Angles between 270° to 360° are in the fourth quadrant al An angle in standard position is said to lie in a quadrant if its ‘Third “| Fourth terminal side lies in that quadrant. Angles & f. and @lie in I, 11, Quadrant | Quadrant ML and IV quadrant respectively in figure 7.3.1, Quadrantal Angles If the terminal side of an angle in standard position falls on x-axis or axis, then itis called a quadrantal angle i.e, 90°, 180°, 270° and 360° are quadrantal angles. The quadrantal angles are shown as below: y y y 5 90" 180 70° o * 0 * Oo * Fig. 7.3.2 7.3(iii) Trigonometric ratios and their reciprocals with the help of a unit circle. ‘There are six fundamental trigonometric ratios called sine, cosine, tangent, cotangent, secant and cosecant, To define these functions we use circular approach which involves the unit circle, Let Obe a real number, which represents the radian measure of an angle in standard position. Let P (x, y) be any point on the unit circle lying on terminal side of @as shown in the figure. We detine sine of @, written as sin@ and cosine of 0 written as c0s8, as: sng snoay OE x = and cos=Gp=] = cosdax Fig. 733 i.e,, cos@ and sind are the x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the point P on the unit circle. The equations x = cos@ and y = sind are called circular or trigonometric functions, ‘The remaining trigonometric functions tangent, cotangent, secant and cosecant will be denoted by tan6, cot6, sec@ and cosec@ for any real angle 8.2 EP tn 0=5R=) = tand=* (#0) since y=sin@ and x=cos@ => tang = 228 cote= 40) => 1 sec 0=7(x#0) and 1 cos 6 Reciprocal Identities 1 sind= eco OF cosecO=TG 1 1 c0sd=2 oF secO= - cotd Find the value of the trigonomettic ratios at 8 if point (3, 4) is on the terminal sides of @ GOMND We have r=3 and y=4 We shall also need value of r, which is found by using the fact that reiety? : raf)? + 4)? =\25 = 5 where r= 10?! 5 Thus sing=2=$ 5 coscco=> 7 ?G4) x3 5 4 3. seca=3 ip med ri. tand=2=F 5 cotO=5 7.3(iv) The values of trigonometric ratio for 45°, 30°, 60°. Consider a right triangle ABC with m Z C = 90°. The sides opposite to the vertices A, B and C are denoted by a, b and ¢ respectively. Case 1 When m ZA = 45°, where 45° = of angles in a triangle is 180°, som Z B= 45°. ‘As values of trigonometric functions depend on the size 4 of the angle only and not on the size of triangle. For convenience, we take a= b = 1. In this case the triangle is isosceles right triangle.e=2 a From this triangle, we have a fs inE sind5® = sin once 045° = cos F 0 = tan Eat tand5? tan F=f == Case IT Whenm ZA=30° orm ZA=60" Consider an equilateral triangle with sides a =2 for convenience, Since the angles in an equilateral triangle are equal and their sum is 180°, each angle has measure 60”. Bisecting an angle in the triangle, we obtain two right triangles with 30° and 60° angles. The height [ADI of these triangles may be found by Pythagorean theorem, i.e., Using triangle ADB with m ZA = 30°, we have BD 1 sin30°= sin = p= cose 30° = 4p _B £0330? = cosg= 45 = sec 30° m_BD_A Ye tan30 = tan = 4D = 35 cot 30° Now using triangle ABD with mZB = 60°, sinooe 4203 singo? = 42 31 2 8 T 7.3(v) Signs of trigonometric ratios in different quadrants In case of trigonometric ratios like sind, cos@ and tan if 4s not a quadrantal angle, then @ will lie in a particular quadrant. Since r = “[x? +)? is always +ve, the signs of ratios can be found if the quadrant of is known, (©) If @ lies in first quadrant, then a point P (x, y) on its terminal side has x and y co-ordinate positive. Therefore, all trigonometric functions are positive in quadrant I (i) If 8 lies in 2nd quadrant, then point P(x, y) on its terminal side has negative x-coordinate and positive y-coordinate. . sin@=is tve or>0 cos ="is—ve or 0 (iv) When @ lies in fourth quadrant, then the point P (x, y) on the terminal side of @ has positive x-coordinate and negative y-coordinate . sind=*is ve or <0, cos=*is +ve or> 0 and tand=~is ve or <0 The signs of all trigonometric functions are summarized as below. Read ‘ASTC’ as “Add Sugar To Coffee”7.3(vi) Values of remaining trigonometric ratios if one trigonometric ratio is given ‘The method is illustrated by the following examples: ENTE si cos: pa etn ener elect heer? eater SUM Applying the identities that express the remaining trigonometric functions in terms plying press 2 trig ‘of sine and cosine, we have and cotd: 8 (RENTED 1 tano= e then find the values of other trigonometric ratios at 6 SUMAN in any right triangle ABC, 2 tno B 2 = a=3,b=2 © Now by Pythagorean theorem @4h=a2 = (f5)2+Q2=27.3(vii) Calculate the values of trigonometric ratios for 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°, 360° We have discussed quadrantal angles in section 7.3.2. An angle @ is called a ‘quadrantal angle if its terminal side lies on the x-axis or on the y-axis. CaseT When 6=0° The point (1, 0) lies on the terminal side of angle @”. We may consider the point on the unit circle on the terminal side of the angle. P(,0) = x=landy=0 so raVP+yPayir0=1 © (undefined) 1a =T=O , coset = Fag cos0? = tan0” Case IT When @= 90° The point P (0, 1) lies on the terminal side of angle 90° a1 = r=VOrmi=1 *hp.o, 1) yd KY , (undefined) Case TIL When @ = 180° The point P (-1, 0) lies on x-axis or ‘on terminal side of angle 180° x (undefined) (undefined) Case IV When @= 270? and the point P (0, -1) lies on y-axis or on the terminal side of angle 270°.‘The point P (0, -1) shows that x=0 and y= So r=VOP+CDP=1 x 3 cosec270° 707 c0s270°=Z=7=0 ; sec270°= T= 95 ae x tan270° = 170, » Case V When 6°= y Now the point P (1, 0) ies once again on x-axis We know that @+2in=6 where ke Z. Now 4=360°= 0° + (360°) 1=0" — where k= 1 So sin360°=sin0°=0 ; cosec360° © (undefined) — cos0”. al £05360" = cos0" = 1 + see360"=— =F L tan? 0 Find cach of the following without using table or calculator: @) coss40” — (ii) sin315° (iii) sec (-300% y (QAM We know that 2kt + A= 0, where ke Z @ 540° 2) + 180° 3007 tan360° = tan0” = 0 00360" = (undefined) 60" (ii) sec 315% = sin (360°— 45°) -a(3)-- (il)S90 Oe — 1. Locate each of the following angles in standard position using a protractor or fair free hhand guess. Also find a positive and a negative angle coterminal with each given angle. @ 170° Gi) 780° ii) -100° Gy) -500" 2, Identify the closest quadrantal angles between which the following angles lies. @ 156° i) 318° ii) 572° iy) -330° 3. Write the closest quadrantal angles between which the angle lies. Write your answer in radian measure. x 3n a ay aot Os Ole wz wy 4, In which quadrant @lie when (@ — sind>0 , tand<0 Gi) cosd<0 , sind<0 Gi) secd>0 , sind<0 Gv) cos0<0 , tand<0 (W) eosecd> 0, cos6>0 (vi) sind<0 , secd<0 5. Fill in the blanks. (@ cos(-150°) . cos150° (Gi) sin (-310°) sin310° (i) tam 210°) = soar t€M210° Civ) COt 459) = anens C08 45” (v) sec (60°) sec 60° (vi) cosec (-137°) soe CoseC 137° 6. ‘The given point P lies on the terminal side of @ Find quadrant of @ and all six eigonomettic ratios @ 2,3) Gi) 3, 4) ii) (2, 1) 7. Af cos@ = 5 and terminal arm of the angle 0 is in quadrant II, find the values of remaining trigonometric functions. 4 8. If tan = and sin@< 0, find the values of other trigonometric functions at 8. 9. If sind= 75 and terminal side of the angle is not in quadrant I, find the values of tand, sec8, and cosec@. 3 10. Ifeosec @= 15 and sec @> 0, find the remaining trigonometric functions. 11, Find the values of trigonometric functions at the indicated angle @ in the right triangle. 4 17 oS 32 wy «iy 12. ind the values of the trigonometric functions. Do not use trigonometric tables or calculator.G)_tan30° Gv) cot (i) eos (-450") ©) sin (xi) cot (xii) cos 225° 7.4 Trigonometric Identities We have discussed trigonometric functions (ratios) and their reciprocals in section 7.3. Consider an angle ZMOP = @ radian in standard position, Let point P (x, y) be on the terminal side of the angle. By Pythagorean theorem, we have from right triangle Ome. OM? +P? = oP* Beyer uw Dividing both sides by 72, we get = O+- > (cos? + (sin? = cos*8+ sin?@= 1 ay Dividing (i) by x°, we have 22 ei eee Sigs = 1-6 + tnda2and sed > 1 + (tan)? = (sec? 1 +tan?@=sec?@ or sec?@-tan?@= 1 Q) Again dividing both sides of (i) by y®, we get 2 yp x ¥ yyy Ga-G 2 ono => (cot? +1 = (cosecO)? and cosecO= y1 + c0t@= cosec?@ or cosec*@— cot?6= 1 @) The identities (1), (2) and (3) are also known as Pythagorean Identities. The fundamental identities are used to simplify expressions involving trigonometric functions. ENED Verify that cord secO= cosecd Expressing left hand side in terms of sine and cosine, we have 0s _1 sind“ cos cot8 sec =RHS CRETTDD Verify that tan40+ tan? = tan?O sec? QUINN 1.1.8 = tanto tan?9= tan? (tan? + 1) + tanO4 1 = 80028 = tan? sec?@ =RHS cotta EEMMTED Show tha 5 cota ( cosec*@- cot?@= ‘) soseca+ | MMB s= (eosec?a~ 1) _ (cosecar— 1N(cosecar+ 1 coseca-1 (coseca@— 1) (EENTIED xpress the trigonometric functions in terms of tané. OTN By using reciprocal identity, we can express cotBin terms of tand. coseca=1 c0r°O= cosee?O— 1 sosec @+1=RHS ie, By solving the identity 1 + tan?@= sec? Note: We can express all the We have expressed sec@in terms of tan@ trigonometric functions in terms of one igonometric secO=t/tan?0+ 1 function. 1 1 con eg > = a Because sin@= tan cos@, we have tan 1 0= and ———]= o 4 avon) +Vtan’o+ 1 1 _ tytan?@+1 cosecd=5= SyS"PpovesterS— In Problems 1-6, simplify each expression to a single trigonometric function, 2 1 2. tanx sinx sex osx tanx — cos? cn 4. 1-costy 5. secte=1 6. sin’r. coer In problems 7-24, verify the identities. sin + cos 7. (= sin(1 + sind) = cost 8. = 14+ tand 9. (land+ cot) tand= sec? 10. (cot8+ cosecd) (1an8~ sin®) = sec cosd sind+cosd__ cos cos? Sages 12, SEF + sine=cosece 2 13. sec cos0=tanOsind 14, 8 cose—sece cos 15, tan + cotd=secBcosecd 16. (tan8+ cot6) (cos0+ sind) = sec8+ cosecd Leos sind_ 17. sin8(tan8+ cord) = seed ig, heed, sind = 2eosec 1 1 19. Tr cos8* T+ cos™ 26080078 20. sind 21, sin’ sin®~ sinéeos*@ 22. cos*8~ sin*O= (cos?O— sin®6) » sind om secO+1 = cos sec: tand7.5 Angle of Elevation and Angle of Depression One of the objects of trigonometry is to find the distances between points or the heights of objects, without actually measuring these distances or heights. Angle of elevation: Suppose O, P and Q are three points, P being at a higher level of O and Q being at lower level than O. Let a horizontal line drawn through O meet in M, the vertical line drawn through P and Q. The angle MOP is called the angle of elevation of point P as seen from 0. For looking at @ below the horizontal line we have to lower our eyes and ZMOQ is called the angle of depression. ‘We measure an angle of elevation from a horizontal line up to an object or an angle of depression from a horizontal line down to an object, see figure 7.5.2. Horizontal line observer a observer Angle of elevation Horizontal line @ Fig. 752 © Object 7.5(i) Find angle of elevation and angle of depression: For finding distances, heights and angles by the use of trigonometric functions, consider the following examples: A flagpole 17.9 meter high casts a7 meter shadow Find the angle of elevation of the sun. GUM From the figure, we observe that o.is the angle of elevation Using the fact that 179 tan a= @= 7 = 2.55714 Solving for et gives us tan-! (2.55714) (68.6666)° = 68° 40° 17.9m a= 68° 40"GREEVTED An observation balloon is 4280 meter above the ground and 9613 meter away. from a farmhouse. Find the angle of depression of the farmhouse as observed from the Farm House For problems of this type the angle of elevation of A from B is considered equal to the angle of depression of B from A, as shown in the diagram. AC _ 4280 BC 9613, x= tan! (0.44523) = 24° So, angle of depression is 24° SS". Te Soe tan @ 44523 Find the angle of elevation of the sun if a 6 fect man casts a 3.5 fect shadow. A tree casts a 40 meter shadow when the angle of elevation of the sun is 25°. Find the height of the tree. ‘A 20 feet long ladder is leaning against a wall. The bottom of the ladder is 5 feet from the base of the wall. Find the acute angle (angle of elevation) the ladder makes with the ground, The base of a rectangle is 25 feet and the height of the rectangle is 13 feet. Find the angle that the diagonal of the rectangle makes with the base. A rocket is launched and climbs at a constant angle of 80°. Find the altitude of the rocket after it travels 5000 meter: An acroplane pilot flying at an altitude of 400m wishes to make an approach to an airport at an angle of 50° with the horizontal. How far from the airport will the plane be when the pilot begins to descend? A guy wire (supporting wire) runs from the middle of a utility pole to the ground. ‘The wire makes an angle of 78.2° with the ground and touches the ground 3 meters from the base of the pole. Find the height of the pole. A road is inclined at an angle 5.7°, Suppose that we drive 2 miles up this road starting from sea level. How high above sea level are we? A television antenna of 8 feet height is located on the top of a house. From a point on the ground the angle of elevation to the top of the house is 17° and the angle of elevation to the top of the antenna is 21.8°. Find the height of the house.From an observation point, the angles of depression of two boats in line with this point are found to be 30° and 45°. Find the distance between the two boats if the point of observation is 4000 feet high. 11. Two ships, which ate in line with the base of a vertical cliff, are 120 meters apart. The angles of depression from the top of the cliff to the ships are 30° and 45°, as shown in the diagram. (a) Calculate the distance BC (b) Calculate the height CD, of the cliff 12, Suppose that we are standing on a bridge 30 feet above a river watching a log (piece ‘of wood) floating towards us. If the angle with the horizontal to the front of the log is 16.7° and angle with the horizontal to the back of the log is 14°, how long is the log? MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE - 7 1. Multiple Choice Questions Four possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (7) the correct answer. (The union of two non-collinear rays, which have common end point is called (a) an angle (b) a degree (©) aminute (@) aradiani (iv) w) (wi) (wii), (viii) (ix) (x) @ (ii) (ii) (iv) o wi) (wid) (vii) (x) ‘The system of measurement in which the angle is measured in radians is called (@) CGS system (b) sexagesimal system (MKS system (@ circular system (@ 360° (630° (© 120° (a 3600" 3 sie = @ lise () 135° (6) 150° (@) 30° If tan 6= +3, then Gis equal to (a) 90 () 45° (0) 60° (30 sec (a) 1-sint@ —@) 1 +tan2B— (1 +0879) 1- tanto 1 1 T+sin 6° 1-sin@ (a) 2se20 (b) 200828 (0) se28 (cos 8 $ cosecdso = 1 1 3 Onn OF wor ok sec Ocot O= 1 1 a (sin 0 One Ons ovo cosec? 0- coO= (a) -1 WI 0 @ tan Write short answers of the following questions. Define an angle. ‘What is the sexagesimal system of measurement of angles? How many minutes are there in two right angles? Define radian measure of an angle. Conve ans dgie measure Convert 15° to radians. What is radian measure ofthe central angle of an are 50m long on the circle of radius 25m? Find r when I= 56 cm and 0= 45° Find tan @ when cos0=— and terminal side ofthe angle Bis in fourth quadrant Prove that (1 ~ sin?@) (1 + tan?@)= 1 Fill in the blanks radians degree.Gi) (iv) (w) (wi) (wii) (viii) (ix) & VY VV Vv v ‘The terminal side of angle 235° lies in quadrant. Terminal side of the angle ~30 lics in_quadrant, ‘Area of a circular sector is Ifr=2.cm and @= 3 radian, then area of the circular sector is ‘The general form of the angle 480° is I sind=5, then o= If 8= 300°, then sec (~300)° = 1+ cov8: ——] SUMMAR’ Sec @-tan 6: If we divide the circumference of a circle into 360 equal arcs, then the angle subtended at the centre of the circle by one arc is called one degree and is denoted by Y°. ‘The angle subtended at the centre of the circle by an are, whose length is equal to the radius of the circle, is called one radian. easly between radian and degree measure 57.295 degrees 6 7 Relation between central angle and arc length of acircle: | = 1°-= Tgp fadians , = 0.0175 radians and 1 radian = @ sey Area of acitcular sector, A=3°6 ‘Two or more than two angles with the same initial and terminal sides are called coterminal angles. ‘An angle is called a quadrantal angle, if its terminal side lies on the x-axis or y-axis. A general angle is said to be in standard position if its vertex is at the origin and its initial side is directed along the positive direction of the x-axis of a rectangular coordinate system, There are six fundamental trigonomet tangent, cotangent, secant and cosecant. ‘Trigonometric Identities: (a) cos?0+ sin?@ = 1 (b) 1 +tan?@ = sec? (1 +08 O=cosec?o ic ratios (functions) known as sine, cosine,—_— = SSS [a eee = SSS |e Ee. ee ae eee a In this unit, students will learn how to Prove the following theorems along with corollaries and apply them to solve appropriate problems. 22 In an obtuse-angled triangle, the square on the side opposite to the obtuse angle is equal to the sum of the squares on the sides containing the obtuse angle together with twice the rectangle contained by one of the sides, and the projection on it of the other. 2 In any triangle, the square on the side opposite to an acute angle is equal to the sum of the squares on the sides containing that acute angle diminished by twice the rectangle contained by one of those sides and the projection on it of the other. a In any triangle, the sum of the squares on any two sides is equal to twice the square on half the third side together with twice the square on the median which bisects the third side (Apollonius’ Theorem).SB ee 8.1) In an obtuse angled triangle, the square on the side opposite to the obtuse angle is equal to the sum of the squares on the sides containing the obtuse angle together with twice the rectangle contained by one of the sides, and the projection on it of the other. Given: ABC is a triangle having an obtuse angle BAC at A. Draw CD perpendicular on BA produced So that AD is the projection of AC on BA produced, Take mBC = a, mCA = b, mAB mAD = x and mCD = h. ‘To prove: (BO? = (AC)? + (AB) + 20mAB) (mAD) ie, a@=b?+c2+2cx Proof: Statements Reasons In Zrt8 CDA, mZCDA = 90° Given (AQ? = (AD)? + (CDP Pythagoras Theorem or Bath? @ In ZrtA CDB, mZCDB = 90° Given (BO? = (BDY + (CDP Pythagoras Theorem or @P=(C+x) +R BD=BA+AD S24 Dexter the Gi) Hence a? =e? + 2ex + 6? Using (i) and (ii) je, Gab + 2+ Dex or (BO)? = (AC) + (AB)? + 2(mAB) (mAD)GTP ha AABC with obtuse angle at 4, if CD is an altitude on BA produced and XC = mAB Then prove that (BC)? = 2(AB)(BD) Given: In a AABC, mA is obtuse mAC =mAB and CD being altitude on BA produced. B ‘To prove: (BC) = 2(mAB)(mBD) Proof: Ina ABC, having obtuse angle BAC at A Statements Reasons (BO)*= (BA)*+ (AC)? + 2(mBA)onAD) _| By Theorem 1 = (AB) + (ABY’+2(mAB)(mAD) | Given = 2(AB)?-+ 2(mAB)(mAD) (BC)? = 2mAB(mAB + mAD) ‘On the line segment BD, = 2mAB (mBD) Point 4 is between B and D SS" Soa 1 Given mAC = lem, mBC = 2em, mZC = 120°. Compute the length AB and the area of ABC. Hint: (AB)* = (AC) + (BC)? + 2mAC. mCD_ where (mCD) = (mBC) cos (180° — mZC) (Use theorem 1). om, mii 2. Find m AC if in AABC m BC = = 4/2 em and mZABC = 135°.8.104) Given: AABC with an acute angle CAB at A Take Also, mAD =x and mCD = ‘To prove: (BC)= (AC) + (AB)? — 2(AB) (AD) ies aw Dex Proof: In any triangle, the square on the side opposite to acute angle is equal to sum of the squares on the sides containing that acute angle diminished by twice the rectangle contained by one of those sides and the projection on it of the other. Draw CDLAB so that AD is projection of AC on AB a QD —x 3D <—-—> Hence, a*= b? +c? dex (BO)?= (AC) + (AB)? — 2(AB) (AD) ie, Statements Reasons In ZntA CDA mZCDA= 90° Given 2 Pree Oe (eee In Zrt ACDB, mZCDB = 90° Given (BCP = (BD) + (CD? Pythagoras Theorem B= (cox)? +h From the figure or a? = 2 Dex + x2 +h? Gi) a? = 2 —2ex +b? ‘Using (i) and (ii)=F ee (APOLLONIUS’ THEOREM) 8.L.(ii) In any triangle, the sum of the squares on any two sides is equal to twice the square on half the third side together with twice the square on the median which bisects the third side. _ 4 Given: In a AABG, the median AD bisects A BC. i.e,, mBD = mCD To prove: (AB) + (AC)= 2(BD)* + 2(AD)? Construction: Draw AF 1 BC Cc’ B S c Proof: Statements Reasons InAADB Since ZADBis acute at D (AB) = (BD) + (AD)? - 2. mBD. mFD @ | Using Theorem 2 Now in AADC since ZADCis obtuse at D (AO? = (CD)? + (AD)? +2 mCD. mFD | using 1 = (BD)* + (AD) +2 mBD .mFD Gi) ‘Thus (AB)? + (AC)*= 2(BDy? +2 (AD! Adding (i) and (i) In AABC, ZC is obtuse, ADLBC produced, whereas BD is projection of AB on BC. Prove that (AC)? = (AB)? + (BC)? - 2mBC.mBD Given: In a AABC, ZBCA is obtuse so that ZB is acute, ADLBC produced, whereas BD is projection of AB on BC produced ‘To prove: (AC)? = (AB)? + (BO)? - 2mBC . mBDProof: AC. Find length of the median BD. Ina parallelogram ABCD prove that (AC)? + (BD)? = 2 [(AB)? + (BC?) Statements Reasons In Zrt AABD (ABY = (AD) + (BD? () | Pythagoras Theorem In Zrt AACD (AC)? = (AD)? + (CD)? «@ Pythagoras Theorem or (AC)? = (AD)? + (BD - BC ‘mBC + mCD = mBD (AG? (AD)? + (BD)? + (BOP?=2BC.BD ii) (AC)? = (AB)? + (BOY - 2BC. BD Using @) and Gi) In an Tsosceles AABC, if 4 mAB = mAC and BE 1 AC, then prove that (BC) = 2mAC.mCE ff Given: Inan Isosceles AABC mAB = mAC and BE LAC whereas CE is the projection of BC upon on AC. ‘To prove: (BC) = 2mAC . mCE B c Proof: Statements Reasons. In an isosceles AABC with mAB = mAC. If ZC is acute, then (AB) =(AC)? + (BC) — 2mAC.mCE By Theorem 2 (AO? = (ACP + (BCP — 2mAC MCE ea ea => (BO) 2mAC-mCE =0 Cancel (AC)? on both sides or (BO? = 2mAC. mCE —— EXER — L In a AABC calculate mBC when mAB = 6cm, mAC = 4cm and mZA = 60°. 2. In a AABC, mAB = 6 cm, mBC = 9 cm and D is the mid point of side10. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 8 Ina AABC, mZA = 60°, prove that (BC)? = (AB)? + (AC)? - mAB . mAC. Ina ABC, mZA = 45°, prove that (BC)? = (AB)* + (AC)* — [2 mAB . mAC. Ina AABC, calculate mBC when mAl Ina AABC, calculate mAC when mAl Ina triangle ABC, mBC = 21 cm, mAC Measure the length of projection of AC upon BC. Ina triangle ABC, mBC = 21 cm. mAC Calculate the projection of AB upon BC. Ina AABC, a= 17 cm, b = 15 cmand c= 8 cm. Find mZA. Ina AABC, a= 17 om, b= 15 cmand c= 8 em find mZB. Whether the triangle with sides 5 em, 7 cm, 8 emis acute, obtuce or right angled. 17 cm, mAB = 10 cm. Whether the triangle with sides 8 cm, 15 cm, 17 cm is acute, obtuce or right angled, JMMARY = The projection of a given point on a line segment is the foot of L drawn from the point on that line segment. If CD 1 AB, then evidently D is the foot of perpendicular CD from the point C on the line segment AB. 4 DB The projection of a line segment CD on a line segment AB is the portion EF of the latter intercepted between foots of the perpendiculars drawn from C and D. However projection of a vertical line segment CD on a line segment AB is a point on AB which is of zero dimension. ¢ D‘equal to the sum of the squares on the sides containing the obtuse angle together with ‘twice the rectangle contained by one of the sides, and the projection on it of the other. In any triangle, the square on the side opposite to an acute angle is equal to the sum ‘of the squares on the sides containing that acute angle diminished by twice the rectangle contained by one of those sides and the projection on it of the other. In any triangle, the sum of the squates on any two sides is equal to twice the square on half the third side together with twice the square on the median which bisects the third side (Apollonius’ Theorem).—_— ee SSS pe eee [Se SSS |e ee. ee ae eee a In this unit, students will learn how to Prove the following theorems alongwith corollaries and apply them to solve appropriate problems. 28 One and only one circle can pass through three non collinear points. 2» A straight line, drawn from the centre of a circle to bisect a chord (which is not a diameter) is perpendicular to the chord. 2 Perpendicular from the centre of a circle on a chord bisects it. & If two chords of a circle are congruent then they will be equidistant from the centre. 2% Two chords of a circle which are equidistant from the centre are congruent. €)Basic concepts of the circle A cirele is the locus of a moving point P in a plane which is always equidistant from some fixed point O. The fixed point 0 not lying on the circle is called the centre, the constant distance OP is its radius whereas the boundary traced by moving point P is called circumference of the cicle. Note that the radial segment of a circle is fr, a line segment, determined by the centre and a point on the circle. There is only one centre point whereas all the radii ofa circle are equal in length, In the adjoining figure (i) of the circle, the P Q length of radial segment = mOP = m0Q = mOT Fig. (i) Cy. 2nr is the circumference of a circle with radius r whereas an irrational number 7 being the ratio of the circumference and the diameter of a given circle. ‘An are ACB of a circle is any portion of _p| its circumference. ‘A chord AKB of a citcle is a line segment joining any two points A and B on the ‘circumference of a circle. Whereas diameter POQ is the chord passing through the centre of a circle. Evidently diameter bisects a circle. Fig. (i) A segment is the portion of a circle bounded by an are and a corresponding chord Evidently any chord divides a circle into two segments. In figure (ii) the bigger area shown by J slanting line segments is the major segment whereas the smaller area shown by shading is the minor segment. A sector of a circle is the plane figure bounded by two radii and the are intercepted between them. Any pair of radii divides a circle into two sectors. In the figure (ii) OAIB is the minor sector, whereas OAJB is the major sector of the minor segment \_ minor sector iy, Fig. Gil) circle ZAOB is the central angle of a circle whose vertex is at the centre O and its arms meet at the end points of the arc AB.9.10) Given: A, B and C are three non collinear points in plane, To prove: One and only one circle can pass through, three non-collinear points A, B and C. Construction: Join A with B and B with C. Draw DF 1 bisector to AB and HIK 1 bisector to BC. So, DF and HK are not parallel and they intersect each other at point O. Also join A, B and C with point 0. Proof: =——J THEOREM1 \e—= ‘One and only one circle can pass through three non-c Statements Reasons Every point on DF is equidistant from A and B. In particular mOA = mOB @ Similarly every point on HK is equidistant from, Band. In particular mOB = mC ) ‘Now 0 is the only point common to DF and IK which is equidistant from A, B and C. i.e, mOA = mOB = mOC ‘However there is no such other point expect 0. Hence a circle with centre O and radius OA will pass through A, B and C. Ultimately there is only one circle which passes through three given points A, B and C. EEN Show that only one circle can be drawn ‘0 pass through the vertices of any rectangle. Given: ABCD is a rectangle. To Prove: Only one circle can be drawn through the vertices of the rectangle ABCD. Construction: Diagonals AC and BD of the rectangle ‘meet each other at point 0. DF 1 bisector to AB (construction) FR is 1 bisector to BC (construction) Using (i) and (ii) ZS wn LLNS JState Reasons ABCD is a rectangle. Given mC =mBD (| Diagonals of a rectangle are equal. “KC and BD meet each other at 0 Construction ©. mOA =mOC and mOB = mOD Gi) | Diagonals of rectangle bisect each other => mOA = mOB = mOC = mOD- ii) ‘Using (i) and (ii) ie, point O is equidistant from all vertices of the rectangle ABCD. Hence OA, OB, OC and OD are the radii of the circle which is passing through the vertices of the rectangle having centre O. =" 9) 9.1(i) A straight line, drawn from the centre of a circle to bisect a chord (which is not a diameter) is perpendicular to the chord. Given: M is the mid point of any chord AB of a circle with centre at 0. Where chord AB is not the diameter of the circle. ‘To prove: OM B Constructio Write Z 1 and 22 as shown in the figure. Proof: ‘Statements Reasons In A OAM © AOBM mA = mOB Radii of the same circle miM = mBMt Given mOM=mOWt ‘Common AOAM = AOBM SSS=SSS > m£l=mZ2 (i) | Corresponding angles of congruent triangles ice, m Z1 +m 22 =mZAMB = 180° Gi) Adjacent supplementary angles _mZl=mZ2=9" From (i) and (i) ie, OM LABTHEOREM 3 9.1Gii) Perpendicular from the centre of a circle on a chord bisects it. Given: AB is the chord of a circle with centre at 0 so that OM L chord AB. ‘To prove: M is the mid point of chord AB ie, mAM =mBM Construction: Join A and B with centre 0. Proof: Statements In Zr. A OAM © OBM mZOMA = mZOMB = 90° hyp. mOA = hyp. mOB. mOM = mOM © AOAM=AOBM Hence, mAM = mBM => OM bisccts the chord AB. Corollary 1: Corollary of a circle. ‘of two citcles and intercepted by them are equal, ‘Reasons Given Radi of the same circle ‘Common In Za’ HS=HS Corresponding sides ‘congruent triangles of _L bisector of the chord of a circle passes through the centre of a circle. ‘The diameter of a circle passes through the mid points of two parallel chords Parallel lines passing through the points of intersection, Given: Two circles have centres O, and 0, PE B They intersect each other at points E and F. ( Ik Line segment AB I Line segment CD o| 0, ‘To Prove: mAB=mD Is Construction: Draw PT and RS 1 both AB and <~C" [5 D ©D and join the centres 0, and O,, Pros Statements Reasons Construction PRST is a rectangle PR=mTS a By Theorem 34 (m AE +m EB) Using (i), (ii) and S"PowwW rr = 1. Prove that, the diameters of a circle bisect each other. 2. Two chords of a circle do not pass through the centre, Prove that they cannot bisect each other. 3. If length of the chord AB diameter of such circle. 4, Calculate the length of a chord which stands at a distance Sem from the centre of a circle whose radius is Sem, =——\] THEOREM4 (= 9.L(iv) If two chords of a circle are congruent then they will be equidistant from the centre. = Scm, Its distance from the centre is 3 cm, then find the Given: AB and GD are two equal chords of a circle with centre at 0, So that OH | AB and OK 1 CD. ‘To prove: mOH=mOK Construction: Join O with A and O with C. ‘So that we have ZrtA’ OAH and OCK. Proof: Statements OM bisects chord AB OH 1 AB ie, mA =} maB @ Similarly OK bisects chord CD OKLCD By Theorem3 mtb @ ie, mK:But = mAB=mCD Given Hence mAH =mCK (ivy | Using G, (i) & Gi) Now in Zrt A‘ OAH © OCK Given OF LAB and OR 1. CD hyp OA =hyp OC Radi of the same circle AR = mCR ‘Already proved in (iv) AOAH= AOCK HLS postulate == mOH=mOK =" ee 9.1(%) Two chords of a circle which are equidistant from the centre, are congruent. Given: AB and ED are two chords of a circle with centre at 0. OF AB and OK 1 CD, so that mOH = mOK ‘To prove: m4B = mCB Construction: Toin A and C with 0. So that we can form (ZrtX* OAH and OCK. Proof: Statements Reasons In 271 Av OAH © OCK. hyp OA =hyp OC Radii of the same circle. Given HLS Postulate () | Comesponding sides of ‘congruent triangles Gi) | Of Lchord AB (Given) (ii) | OK Lchord @D Given) Since mAH= mK Aleady proved in (i) oe }maB 4m cD ‘Using (ii) & (iii) or mAB =m CD Prove that the largest chord in a circle is the diameter.Given: AB is a chord and CD is the diameter of a circle with centre point 0. ‘To prove: IFAB and CD are distinct, then mCD > mAB. Construction: Join O with A and O with B then form a A OAB. Proof: Sum of two sides of a triangle is greater than its third side. InAOAB => mA + mOB > mAB @ But OA and OB are the radii of the same circle with centre 0. So that mOA + mOB cD «i => Diameter CD > chord AB using (i) & Gi) Hence, diameter CD is greater than any other chord drawn in the circle SS ey ‘Two equal chords of a circle intersect, show that the segments of the one are equal corresponding to the segments of the other AB is the chord of a circle and the diameter CD is perpendicular bisector of AB. Prove that mAC = mBC. 3. As shown in the figure, find the distance between two parallel chords AB and CD. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 9 Multiple Choice Questions 1. Four possible answers are given for the following questions. ‘Tick (¥) the correct answer. (Inthe circular figure, ADB is called @ mate (b) asecant B © (d) adiameter achordii) @) o wi) (wi) (viii) (ix) @ (i) (xi) In the circular figure, ACB is called (a) anare (b) asecant (© achord (@) adiameter In the circular figure, AOB is called @ anare (B) asecant (© achord (@) adiameter B A mom B In a circular figure, two chords AB and CD are a equidistant from the centre. They will be Ze (a) parallel (b) non congruent A (©) congruent (@ perpendicular a7? Radi of a circle are (a) allequal (b) double of the diameter () all unequal (@) half of any chord A chord passing through the centre of a circle is called @ radius () diameter (©) circumference (d) secant Right bisector of the chord of a circle always passes through the (@) radius () circumference (© centre (@) diameter The circular region bounded by two radii and the corresponding arc is called (@ circumference of a circle (B) sector of a circle (©) diameter of a circle (@) segment of a circle The distance of any point of the circle to its centre is called @ radius (®) diameter (©) achord ~—(@)_—aanare Line segment joining any point of the circle to the centre is called (@ circumference ©) diameter (©) radial segment (a) perimeter Locus of a point in a plane equidistant from a fixed point is called @ radius (circle (© circumference (d)__ diameter ‘The symbol for a triangle is denoted by @ Zz A ol @ ©(xiv) Q2. A complete circle is divided into (a) degrees (b) 180degrees (c) 270 degrees (d) 360 degrees ‘Through how many non collinear points, can a circle pass? (a) one () two (©) three (none Differentiate between the following terms and illustrate them by diagrams. ()—Acitcle and a circumference. (if) Acchord and the diameter of a circle. (iii) Acchord and an are of a circle. (iv) Minor are and major arc of a circle, (v) Interior and exterior of a circle (vi) A sector and a segment of a circle, =<) SUMMAR’ 2nr is the circumference of a circle with radius r. to? is the area of a circle with radius r. Three or more points lying on the same line are called collinear points otherwise they are non-collinear points The circle passing through the vertices of a triangle is called its circumeircle whereas bisectors of sides of the triangle provide the centre. One and only one circle can pass through three non-collinear points, A straight line, drawn from the centre of a citcle to bisect a chord (which is not a diameter) is perpendicular to the chord, Perpendicular from the centre of a circle on a chord bisects it. If two chords of a circle are congruent, then they will be equidistant from the centre, ‘Two chords of a circle which are equidistant from the centre are congruent.—_— ee SSS pe eee [Se SSS |e ee. ee ae eee a In this unit, students will learn how to Prove the following theorems alongwith corollaries and apply them to solve appropriate problems. 2s If a line is drawn perpendicular to a radial segment of a circle at its outer end point, itis tangent to the circle at that point. & The tangent to a circle and the radial segment joining the point of contact and the centre are perpendicular to each other. 2 The two tangents drawn to a circle from a point outside it, are equal in length. 2m If two circles touch externally or internally, the distance between their centres is respectively equal to the sum or difference of their radii.‘Definition: A secant is a straight line which cuts the circumference of a circle in two distinct points. In the figure | indicates the secant line to the circle C,. Definition: A tangent to a circle is the straight line which touches the circumference at a single point only. The point of tangency is also known as the point of contact. In the figure AB indicates the tangent line to the circle Cy, AN ? Tr A B q Q SFr 10.1(i) Ifa tine is drawn perpendicular to a radial segment of a circle at its outer end point, it is tangent to the circle at that point. f A P c B = oe = Given: A citele with centre O and OC is the radial segment. AB is perpendicular to OC at its outer end C. o To prove: AB is a tangent to the circle at C. o Construction: Take any point P other than Con AB. join O with P. Proof: Statements Reasons In AOCP, meocP =" 4B 1 OC given) and = mZOPC<90° ae angle of right angled who aoais a point outside the circle. Similarly, every point on AB except C lies outside the circle. OC is the radial segment. 2 Hence AB intersects the circle at one point C only. o AB isa tangent to the circle at one =" ea ‘The tangent to a circle and the radial segment joining the point of contact and the centre are perpendicular to each other. D A P Cc B Given: Ina circle with centre O has radius OC, ABis the tangent to the circle at point C. 'o prove: AB and radial segment Gare perpendicular to each other Construction: Take any point P other than C on the tangent line AB. Join O with P so that OP meets the circle at D. Pro Statements Reasons AB is the tangent to the circle at point C. Whereas | Given OP cuts the circle at D. Construction mOC = mOD (i) | Radi of the same circle But mOD OBP _ . > mZOAP = mZOBP = 90° Radii 1 to the tangents PA and PB hyp. OP = hyp. OP ‘Common mOA=m 0B Radii of the same circle. + NOAP =A OBP InZd’ HSZHS Hence, mPA = mPB Note: The length of a tangent to a circle is measured from the given point to the point of contact. > Corollary: If 0 is the centre of a circle and two tangents PA and PB are drawn from an external point P then OP is the right bisector of the chord of contact AB. ETTED Fis a diameter of a given circle with contre O. Tangents are drawn at the end ‘points A and B. Show that the two tangents are parallel.c. Given: ABis a diameter of a given circle with centre 0. CD is the tangent to the citcle at point A and EF is an other tangent at point B. ‘To prove: CD EF Proof: Statements Reasons Bis the diameter of a circle with centre 0. | Given OA and OB are radii of the same circle. Moreover CD is a tangent to the circle at A. Given : TAL By Theorem 1 =e ABLCD @ 3 . Similarly EF is tangent at point B. Given so OBLEF By Theorem 1 > => ABLEF a, oO Hence CD IEF From (i) and (i) oo (CD and EF are perpendicular to AB)GEWNTED In a circle, the tangents drawn at the ends of a chord, make equal angles with that chord. Given: ABis the chord of a circle with centre O. ‘CAD ‘is the tangent at point A and “EBF is an other tangent at point B. ‘To prove: mZBAD = mZABF Construction: Join O with A and B so that we form a AOAB then write Z1, 22, 23 and 24 as shown in the figure. Proof: ‘Statements Reasons In OAB Construction “mA = mB Rati of the same circle : les opp. to equal sides mZl=m 22 @ oer os Also TALCD Radius iso the tangent line 2 mZ3=mZOAD = 9° wi Similarly OBL EF Radius is 1 to the tangent 2 mZ4=mZOBF =90° Git) Hence m 23 =m 24 (iv) | Using Gi) and «ity mZ1+mZ3=m22+mZa ‘Adding () and (iv) mZBAD = mZABF Tangent to a Circle GoaProve that the tangents drawn at the ends of a diameter in a given circle must be parallel 2. The diameters of two concentric circles are 10cm B and Sem respectively, Look for the length of any chord of the outer citcle which touches the inner one. (in) Fonte igs ob Ne mAB = 2x = 225 - 6.25 = 218.75 ~ 8.7em eos 3. AB and CD are the common tangents drawn to the pair of circles. IFA and C are the points of tangency of Ist circle where B and D are the points of tangency of 2nd circle, then prove that AC // BD. =—) THEOREM 4(A) (== 10.1(iv) If two circles touch externally then the distance between their centres is equal to the sum of their radii. 4 B Given: Two citcles with centres D and F respectively touch each other extemally at point C. So that CD and CF are respectively the radii of the two circles. ‘To prove: Point C lies on the join of centres D and F and mDF = mDC + mCF —> Construction: Draw ‘ACB’ as a common tangent to the pair of circles at C.Proof: Statements Both citcles touch extemally at C whereas CD is radial segment and ACB is the common tangent, * mZACD = 90° @ Similarly CF is radial segment and ACB is the common tangent * mZACF =90° Gi) mZACD + mZACF = 900 + 90° mZDCF = 180° Gi) Hence DCF is a line segment with point C between DandF and _mDF = mDC + mCF Reasons Radial segment CD 1 the tangent line AB Radial segment CF 1 the tangent line AB Adding (i) and (ii) Sum of supplementary adjacent angles —— EXERCISE 10.2 — 1 AB and CD are two equal chords in a circle with centre O, H and K are respectively the mid points of the chords, Prove that AK makes equal angles with 1B and CD. 2. ‘The radius of a circle is 2.5 em. AB and CD are two chords 3.9em apart. If mAB = 1.4.cm, then measure the other chord. 3. The radii of two intersecting circles are 10cm and 8cm, If the length of their common chord is 6cm then find the distance between the centres. 4, Show that greatest chord in a circle is its diameter. =o 10.109) If two circles touch each other internally, then the point of contact lies on the ine segment through their centres and distance between their centres is equal to the difference of their radii. AGiven: Two circles with centres D and F touch each other internally at point C. So that CD and CF are the radi of two circles. ‘Yo prove: Point C lies on te join of centres D and F extended and m DF = mDC - mF Construction: Draw ‘ACB’ as the common tangent to the pair of circles at C. Proof: Statemen Reasons Both circles touch internally at C whereas ‘ACB is the common tangent and CD is the radial segment of the first circle, = mZACD =90° @® | Radial segment TD L the tangent line AB Similarly ‘ACB’ is the common tangent and CF is the radial segment of the second circle. mZACF = 90° Gi) | Radial segment TF L the tangent line AB. => mZACD = mZACF =90° Using @) and Gi) Where ZACD and ZACF coincide each other with point F between D and C. Hence mDC = mDF + mFC ie, — mDC-mFC = mDF or mDF = mDC — mFC_ ‘Three circles touch in pairs externally. Prove that the perimeter of a triangle formed by joining centres is equal to the sum of their diameters. Given: Three circles have centres A, B and C their radii are yf and ry respectively. They touch in pairs externally at D, : E and F. So that AABC is formed by joining the centres of these circles. ro Ty Perimeter of ABC =2r, + 2r, +2r=d) +d +dy 7 = Sum of the diameters of these circles.Proof: Statements Reasons Three circles with centres A, B and C touch | Given in pairs externally at the points, D, E and F. mAB = mAF + mFB Gi) mBC = mBD + mDC (ii) and mCA=mCE+mEA Gi mAB + mBC + mCA = mAF + mFB + mBD ‘Adding (i), (ii) and (iii) + mDC + mCE + mEA = (mAF + mEA) + (mFB + mBD) + (mCD + mCE) Dry +2ry + 2ry 2ry, dy=2r, and d, = 2r, djtd,t+d, are diameters of the circles. = Sum of diameters of the circles. =—Toae 1. Two circles with radii Sem and dem touch each other externally. Draw another circle with radius 2. Sem touching the first pair, externally 2. If the distance between the centres of two circles is the sum or the difference of their radii they will touch each other. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 10 Multiple Choice Questions Four possible answers are given for the following questions. ‘Tick (7) the correct answer. (i) In the adjacent figure of the circle, the line g, — PTO is named as, (@)— anare (&) — achord (ce) atangent (@) — asecant Pi) (ii) (iv) w) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) In a circle with centre O, if OT is the radial <3 segment and PT@ is the tangent line, then r a 1 & (@) OTLPQ ® orh£ra ns © OTIPO a ° (dy OT is right bisector of PQ In the adjacent figure, find semicircular area if x = 3.1416 and mA = 20cm. (a) 62.83sqem —(b)_—-314.16sq.0m (©) 436.20sqem (d)—_628.32sq.em In the adjacent figure, find half the perimeter of circle with centre O if m ~ 3.1416 and mOA = 20cm. (@ —-3142em —) 62.832 em (© 128.65em =) 188.50em 4 oO B A line which has two points in common with a circle is called: (a) sine of acircle (8) cosine of a circle (©) tangent of a circle (d)_ secant of accircle A line which has only one point in common with a citcle is called: (@) sine of a circle () cosine of a circle (©) tangent of a circle (@)_— secant of acitcle Two tangents drawn to a circle from a point outside it are of... in length, (a) half (6) equal (©) double (@)_ triple A circle has only one: (@) secant (6) chord (© diameter ()— centre A tangent line intersects the circle at (a) three points (6) two points (c) single point (4) _ no point at all‘Tangents drawn at the ends of diameter of a circle are ..... to each other. (@ parallel (@) non-parallel (c) collinear (d)_ perpendicular (xi) The distance between the centres of two congruent touching circles externally is’ (a) of zero length (b) the radius of each circle (©) the diameter of each circle (d)__ twice the diameter of each circle (xii) In the adjacent circular figure with centre O and radius B ‘Som, the length of the chord intercepted at 4cm away from the centre of this circle is: (@ om () bem % © Tem @ %m A 0 fF In the adjoining figure, there is a circle with centre O. CF] —c Wf DE i diameter AB and mZAOC = 120%, then mZACDis @ 40° ® (©) So” @ oor = RN A cp Tangent B c D. Ayecant > A secant is a straight line which cuts the circumference of a circle in two distinct points. In the figure, the secant CD cuts the circle at two distinct points P and @. > A tangent to a circle is the straight line which touches the circumference at one point only. The point of tangency is also known as the point of contact in the figure. AB is the tangent line to the circle at the point 7contact. Ifa line is drawn perpendicular to a radial segment of a circle at its outer end point, it is tangent to the circle at that point. ‘The tangent to a circle and the radial segment joining the point of contact and the centre are perpendicular to each other. The two tangents drawn to a circle from a point outside it, are equal in length. If two circles touch externally or internally, the distance between their centres is respectively equal to the sum or difference of their radii,In this unit, students will learn & If two arcs of a circle (or of congruent circles) are congruent, then the corresponding chords are equal. 2 If two chords of a circle (or of congruent circles) are equal, then their corresponding arcs (minor, major or semi-circular) are congruent. 2 Equal chords of a circle (or of congruent circles) subtend equal angles at the centre (at the corresponding centres). 2» If the angles subtended by two chords of a circle (or congruent circles) at the centre (corresponding centres) are equal, the chords are equal.then the corresponding chords are equal. B <> So D Given: ABCD and A‘B'C’D’ are two congruent circles with centres O and O’ respectively. So that mADC = mA‘D'C’ ‘Yo prove: mAC = mA Construction: Join 0 with A, O with C, Of with A’ and O' with C’ So that we can form A’ OAC and O'A'C’ Pro "Se 11.1@) If two arcs of a circle (or of congruent circles) are congruent Statements Reasons In two equal circles ABCD and A’B’CD” with centres O and 0” respectively. mADC = mA'D'C mZAOC=mZA'0'C Now in AOC > AV'O'C mOA = m0" mZA0C =mZ AOC mOC =mOC AAOC=AA'O'C aC Similarly we can prove the theorem in the same circle, and in particular mAC Given Given Central angles subtended by equal arcs of the equal circles. Radii of equal circles Already Proved Radii of equal circles SASZS.AS=—) THEOREM 2 Converse of Theorem 1 11.16) If two chords of a circle (or of congruent circles) are equal, then their corresponding arcs (minor, major or semi-circular) are congruent. In equal circles or in the same circle, if two chords are equal, they cut off equal arcs. NTS Given: ABCD and A’B’CD’ are two congruent circles with centres 0 and 0’ respectively. So that chord mAC = mA"C’. ‘To prove: mADC=mA'D'C Construction: Join O with A, O with C, O’ with A ‘and 0’ with C’, Proof: Statements Reasons In AAOC & AANO'C mOA = mR Radii of equal circles, mOC=mTC Radii of equal circles mAC=maC Given 2 MAOCEAAO'C SSS=SSS => mZAOC=mZ4'0'C Hence mADC=mA BC ‘Ares corresponding to equal central angles.EDDIE A point? on the cizcumterence is equidistant from the radii TA and OB. Prove that m AP =m BP Given: AB is the chord of a circle with centre O. Point P on the circumference of the circle is equidistant from the radii OA and OB so that mPR = mPS. PA ‘To prove: mAP =m BP NW”? Construction: Join O with P, Write 21 and 22 as shown in 7 the figure. Proof: Statements Reasons In Ztt AOPR and Zrt AOPS mOP=m OP ‘Common m PR=m PS Point P is equidistance from radii (Given) AOPR= A OPS (in Zia’ HSEHS) So mZ1=m22 Central angles of a circle => Chord AP = Chord BP =~ = Ares corresponding to equal chords in a Hence_mAP=m BP circle. ——4] THEOREM3 (= 11.1 (i) Equal chords of a circle (or of congruent circles) subtend equal angles at the centre (at the corresponding centres). B Ba 208) Mathematics 10To prove: AOCZ LAO" Construction: Let if possible mZAOC # mZA‘O'C’ then consider ZAOC = ZA‘O'D’ Proof: Statements ‘Reasons LvOD' Construction ‘ @ Arcs subtended by equal Central angles in congruent circles i) Using Theorem 1 But Gi) Given 2 mA = mi" Using (ii) and Gii) Which is only possible, if C’ concides with D’. Hence mZA’O'C =mZA'0'D' tiv) But mZ0'D! w) Construction = = mZA'O'C” Using (iv) and (v) Corollary 1. then corresponding sectors are equal Corollary 2. central angles. In congruent circles or in the same circle, if central angles are equal In congruent circles or in the same circle, unequal atcs will subtend unequal EDITED Tie internal bisector of a central angle in a circle bisects an arc ‘on which it stands. Solution: In a circle with centre O. OP is an internal bisector of central angle AOB. To prove: AP = BP a Construction: Draw AP and BP, then write 21 and 22 as shown in the figure. 4 B P Proof: Statements Reasons In AOAP © AOBP mOA=mOB Radi of the same circle m2 =m22 Given OP as an angle bisector of ZAOB and Common (SAS=S.AS) Chords and Ares‘Arcs corresponding to equal chords in acircle, In a circle if any pair of diameters are to teach other then the lines joining its ends in order, form a square Given: AC and BD are two perpendicular diameters of a circle with centre 0. So ABCD is a quadrilateral. To prove: ABCD is a square Construction: Write Z1, 22, 23, 24, 25 and 26 as shown in the figure. Proof: D Al ESI me 6 B Statements ‘Reasons AC and BD are two 1 diameters of a circle with centre O 2 mL =mZ2=mZ3=mZ4= 90° 2 AB = mBC= mb = mba => mAB=mBC=mCD = mDA @ ‘Moreover mZA = mZ5 + mZ6 45° + 45° = 90° Gi) Similarly mZB=mZC = mZD = 90° Gi) Hence ABCD is a squate Given Pair of diameters are 1 to each other. Arcs opposite to the equal central angles in a circle. Chords corresponding to equal Using (i), (i) and (ii). Mathematics 10SS Tr 11.1(%) If the angles subtended by two chords of a circle (or congruent circles) at the centre (corresponding centres) are equal, the chords are equal. B B ZN Ae & C D D Given: ABCD and A’B’C'D’ ate two congruent circles with centres O and O' respectively. AC and A’C’ are chords of circles ABCD and A’B'C’D’ respectively and m ZAOC =mZA‘0'C” ‘Yo prove: mAC = ma” Proof: Statements Reasons In AOAC > A0'A'C mOA = mA" Radii of congruent circles mZAOC=mZA'0'C Given mOC = mC Radii of congruent circles SAS = SAS@ (ii) (iii) @) o) wi if) (iti) (i) @ =—) EXERCISE 11.1 Ina circle two equal diameters AB and CD intersect each other. Prove that m AD = m BC. Ina circle prove that the arcs between two parallel and equal chords are equal. Give a geometric proof that a pair of bisecting chords are the diameters of a circle. If Cis the mid point of an arc ACB in a circle with centre O. Show that line segment OC bisects the chord AB. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 11 Multiple Choice Questions Four possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (7) the correct answer. ‘A 4.0m long chord subtands a central angle of 60°, The radial segment of this circle is: @ 1 2 © 3 @ 4 ‘The length of a chord and the radial segment of a circle are congruent, the central angle made by the chord will be: @ 30 @) 45° (©) 60° @ 19 ‘Out of two congruent ares of a circle, if one are makes a central angle of 30° then the other arc will subtend the central angle of: @ 19° ® 30° © 4° (d) 60° ‘An are subtends a central angle of 40° then the corresponding chord will subtend a central angle of: @ 2 () 40° (© 60° (80° A pair of chords of a circle subtending two congruent central angles is: (a) congruent (b) incongruent (c) over lapping (d) parallel If an are of a circle subtends a central angle of 60°, then the corresponding chord of the are will make the central angle of: @ 20 () 40° © 60° @ 30° ‘The semi circumference and the diameter of a circle both subtend a central angle of: @ 9 180" © 270 (360° ‘The chord length of a circle subtending a central angle of 180° is always: (a) less than radial segment () equal to the radial segment (© double of the radial segment (d)_ none of these Ifa chord of a circle subtends a central angle of 60°, then the length of the chord and the radial segment are: (@ congruent. (b) incongruent (c) parallel. (d)_perpendicular The ares opposite to incongruent central angles of a circle arc always: (@ congruent (6) incongruent (c) parallel (d)_perpendicularThe boundary traced by a moving point in a circle is called its circumference whereas any portion of the circumference will be known as an arc of the circle, The straight line joining any two points of the circumference is called a chord of the circle. The portion of a circle bounded by an arc and a chord is known as the segment of a circle, The circular region bounded by an arc of a circle and its two corresponding radial segments is called a sector of the circle, A straight line, drawn from the centre of a circle bisecting a chord is perpendicular to the chord and conversely perpendicular drawn from the centre of a circle on a chord, bisects it, If two arcs of a circle (or of congruent circles) are congruent, then the corresponding chords are equal If two chords of a circle (or of congruent circles) are equal, then their corresponding ares (minor, major or semi-circular) are congruent, Equal chords of a citcle (or of congruent circles) subtend equal angles at the centre (at the corresponding centres). If the angles subtended by two chords of a circle (or congruent circles) at the centre (corresponding centres) are equal, the chords are equal.= SSS ee SSeS [Se SSS |e ee. eee el a In this unit, students will learn The measure of a central angle of a minor arc of a circle, is double that of the angle subtended by the corresponding major arc. Any two angles in the same segment of a circle are equal. The angle ina semi-circle is a right angle, in a segment greater than a semi circle is less than a right angle, w in a segment less than a semi-circle is greater than a right angle. The opposite angles of any quadrilateral inscribed in a circle are supplementary. wet tye=—] THEOREM 1 12.1@The measure of a central angle of a minor arc of a circle, is double that of the angle subtended by the corresponding major arc. 5 Given: AC is an arc of a circle with centre 0. Whereas 2 AQCis the central angle and 2 ABCis circum angle. Toprove: mm ZAOC = 2m ZABC Construction: Join B with O and produce it jp to meet the circle at D. Write angles 21, 22, 23, 24 25 and 26 as shown in the figure. + Proof: Statements Reasons As mZl=m23 @ Angles opposite to equal sides in AOAB ZA Gii)__ | Angles opposite to equal sides in AOBC Now mZ5=mZ1+mZ3 (iii) | External angle is the sum of internal Similarly mZ6 = mZ2+mZ4 (iv) ‘opposite angles. Again mZS=mZ34+mZ3=2mZ3 (wv) _| Using (i) and (ii) and mZ6=mZ4+mZ4=2mZ4 (vi) __| Using (i) and Gv) Then from figure = mL5-4+mL6=2mZ3.+2mZ4 Adding (v) and (vi) = mZAOC=2(mZ3 + mZ4) = 2m ZABC CESNNIED The radius of a circle is «2 cm. A chord 2 cm in length divides the circle into two segments, Prove that the angle of larger segment is 45° c Given: In a circle with centre O and radius m OA = m OB =+/2 cm, The length of chord AB = 2 em divides the circle into two segments with ACB as larger one.To prove: mZACB=45° Construction: Join O with A and O with B. Proof: Statements In AOAB (0a)? + (0B) = (2)? + (2)? ye =Q)= (AB) . AAOBis right angled triangle With m ZAOB = 90° Reasons em Which being a central angle standing on an arc AB Then mZACB => mZAOB By theorem 1 (90%) = 45° Circum angle is half of the central angle. Sr 12.1(é) Any two angles in the same segment of a circle are equal. Given: Z ACB and 2 ADB are the circum angles in the same segment of a circle with centre O. x ‘To prove: m ZACB=m ZADB Construction: Join O with A and O with B. So that ZAOB is the central angle. 4 'B Proof: Statements Reasons Standing on the same arc AB of a circle. ZAOB is the central angle whereas Construction ZACB and ZADB ate circum angles Given mZAOB = 2mZACB (| By theorem 1 (i)_| By theorem 1 Using (i) and (i)=—1) THEOREM3 == 12.1 (ii) The angle © ina semi-circle is a right angle, © ima segment greater than a semi circle is less than a right angle, © ima segment less than a semi-circle is greater than a right angle. Fig. I Fig. IT Fig. OL Given: ABis the chord corresponding to an are ADB Whereas 2 AOB is a central angle and 2 ACB is a circum angle of a circle with centre O. ‘To prove: In fig (1) If sector ACB is a semi circle then mZACB = 1Zrt Infig (I) _ If sector ACB is greater than a semi circle then mZACB < 1Zrt Infig (II) _ If sector ACB is less than a semi circle then mZACB > 1Zrt Proof: Statements Reasons In each figure, AB is the chord of a circle with centre 0. | Given Z AOB is the central angle standing on an arc ADB. ‘Whereas ZACB is the circum angle Given Such that mZAOB = 2mZACB @ By theorem Now in fig (l)_mZAOB = 180° A straight angle mZAOB = 221 «i => mZACB=12rt Using (i) and (ii) Infig() —— mZAOB < 180° & mZAOB< 22mZACB <\Zrt ‘Using (i) and ii) Infig (QM) mZAOB> 180° c mZAOB > 221 ww) = 2mZACB> 2Lrt Using () and (iv) = mZACB > 1Zrt | Corollary 1. ‘The angles subtended by an are at the circumference of a circle are equal Corollary 2. The angles in the same segment of a circle are congruent. =—Ex=='= 12.1 (iv) The opposite angles of any quadrilateral inscribed in a circle are supplementary. D A Xo B Given: ABCD is a quadcilateral inscribed in a circle with centre 0. [mZA +mZC=2 Zris To prov mZB +mZD =2 Zris Construction: Draw OA and OC. Write 21, 22, 23, 24, 25 and 26 as shown in the figure,Proof: Statements Reasons Standing on the same atc ADC, 22 is a central | Arc ADC of the circle with centre O. angle ‘Whereas 2B is the circum angle 1 s mZB=5(m £2) @ By theorem 1 Standing on the same arc ABC, 24 is a Are ABC of the circle with central angle whereas 2D is the circum angle _ | centre 0. 2 mLD= h(n) Gi) | By theorem 1 => mZB+mZI fm2o+} m2 Adding (i) and (ii) = 5 (m22.+mZA)=5 Total central angle) ie, mZB+mZD $6 Ln =22n Similarly mZA +mZC=22rt Corollary 1. In equal circles or in the same circle if two minor ares are equal then angles inscribed by their corresponding major arcs are also equal Corollary 2. In equal circles or in the same circle, two equal arcs subtend equal angles at the circumference and vice versa ‘Two equal circles intersect in A and B. Through B, a straight line is drawn to ‘meet the circumferences at P and Q respectively. Prove that mAP = mAQ. GN Py 2 Q wo A Given: Two equal circles cut each other at points A and B. A straight line PBQ drawn through B meets the circles at P and Q respectively. : MAP =mAQ Construetion: Join the points A and B. Also draw AP and AO. Write 21 and 22 as shown in the figure. Topi‘Statements Reasons ‘Ares about the common chord AB. mACB = mADB fe mZl=mZ2 Corresponding angles made by opposite arcs. So mAQ=mAP Sides opposite to equal angles in A APQ. or___mAB=mAQ. LEED 41200 is a quacirilateral circumscribed about a circle Show that miB-+ mCD = mBC + mDA Given: ABCD is a quadrilateral circumscribed about a circle with centre O. So that each side becomes tangent to the circle. ‘Yo prove: mAB-+ mB = mBC + mDA Construction: Drawn OE LAB, OF LBC OG1CD and OHLDA Proof: ‘Statements Reasons :. mAE=mHA ; mEB=mBF Since tangents drawn from een a point to the circle are mCG = mFC and mGD = mDH rca leet (AE + mEB) + (mCG + mGD) = (mBF + mFC) + (mDH + mHA) | Adding G) & (ii) or mAB + mCD = mBC + mDA 1, Prove that in a given cyclic quadrilateral, sum of opposite angles is two right angles. and conversely. 2, Show that parallelogram inscribed in a circle will be a rectangle, AOB and COD are two intersecting chords of a circle, Show that A’ AOD and BOC are equiangular, 4, XD, and BC are two parallel chords of a circle, Prove that arc AB = are CD and arc AC are BD.@ w ii) MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 12 Multiple Choice Questions Four possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (V) the correct answer. ‘A circle passes through the vertices of a right angled AABC with mAC = 3em and mBC = 4.cm, mZC = 90°. Radius of the circle is: (@ 15cm (6) 2.0em © 25cm @ 35cm In the adjacent circular figure, central and inscribed angles stand on the same arc AB. Then Cc A\ rN B (a) mZ1=mZ2 (b) mZ1 = 2mZ2 () mZ2=3mZ1 (@) mZ2=2mZ1 In the adjacent figure if m3 = 75°, then find m1 and m22. aon Paso (a) 373 , 373 (b) 373 75 © 18,37 @ 18,79©) wi) (vii) (iti) Given that Q is the centre of the circle, The angle marked x will be: {c) 50° (d) 75° Given that 0 is the centre of the circle the angle marked y will be: — 6 @ 1% (b) 25° 50° @ 1 @ 2% 6) 2% = In the figure, 0 is the centre of the circle and ABW is a straight line. ‘The obtuse angle AOC = xis: ee (@) 32° (b) 64° © 96 128° In the figure, 0 is the centre of the circle, then the angle x is: @) (@ 55° () 110° © 20° @ 125° In the figure, 0 is the centre of the circle then angle xis: @ ay fe) (a) 15° (b) 30°@) vovvY vv In the figure, O is the centre of the circle then the angle x is: (@ 15° (b) 30° © 45° @ 60 In the figure, O is the centre of the circle then the angle x is: (a) 50° ) @ 125° The angle subtended by an arc at the centre of a circle is called is central angle. A central angle is subtended by two radii with the vertex at the centre of the circle The angle subtended by an ate of a circle at its circumference is called a circumangle, A cireumangle is subtended between any two chords of a circle, having common point on its circumference. A quadrilateral is called cyclic when a circle can be drawn through its four vertices. The measure of a central angle of a minor arc of a circle, is double that of the angle subtended by the corresponding major arc, Any two angles in the same segment of a circle are equal. The angle * ina semi-circle is a right angle, ‘* ina segment greater than a semi-circle is less than a right angle, ‘+ ima segment less than a semi-circle is greater than a right angle. ‘The opposite angles of any quadrilateral inscribed in a circle are supplementary.[a a ee nel oe je ee eel a —— eee |e == In this unit, students will learn how to locate the centre of a given circle. draw a circle passing through three given non-collinear points. complete the circle when a part of its circumference is given, (i) by finding the centre, (ii) without finding the centre. circumscribe a circle about a given triangle. inscribe a circle in a given triangle. escribe a circle in a given triangle. circumscribe an equilateral triangle about a given circle. inscribe an equilateral triangle in a given circle. circumscribe a square about a given circle. inscribe a square in a given circle. circumscribe a regular hexagon about a given circle. inscribe a regular hexagon in a given circle. draw a tangent to a given arc, without using the centre, through a given point p when p is the middle point of the arc, p is at the end of the arc and p is outside the arc. draw a tangent to a given circle from a point P when P is on the circumference and when p is outside the circle. draw two tangents to a circle meeting each other at a given angle. draw direct common tangent or external tangents to two equal circles and draw transverse common tangents or internal tangents to two equal circles. & draw direct common tangents or external tangents to two unequal circles and draw transverse common tangents or internal tangents to two unequal circles. 2 draw a tangent to two unequal touching circles and two unequal intersecting circles. 2s draw a circle which touches (i) both the arms of a given angle. (ii) two converging lines and passes through a given point between them. (iii) three converging lines. we SB OB Be Or Be w weINTRODUCTION: The word geometry is derived from two Greek words namely Geo (earth) and Metron (measurement). Infact, geometry means measurement of the earth ot land, Geometry is an important branch of mathematics, which deals with the shape, size and position of geometric figures. We will concentrate upon simple figures namely point, straight line, triangle, polygon and circle in this unit. The Greek mathematicians (600-300 BC) contributed a lot, In particular “Buclid’s Elements” have been taught as text book all over the world for centuries. 13.1 Construction of a Circle A circle of any radius can be constructed by rotating a compass about a fixed point 0. 13.1(i) To locate the centre of a given circle c Given: A circle Steps of Constructio 1, Draw tye chords AB and CD. 2. Draw EFG as perpendicular bisector of chord a © 3. Draw POR as perpendicular bisector of chord cD. 2 ° 4. Perpendicular bisectors EFG and POR intersect each other at O. O is the centre of circle. 13.1Gi)Draw a circle passing through three given non-collinear points: Given: Three non-collinear points A, B and C. Steps of Construction: 1. Join A with B and B with C. Ryo 1B. oe Wee c 2. Draw EMF and PQ right bisectors of AB and BC respectively. £M4/and 40 “intersect at point 0. \ 3. Draw a citcle with radius 0A = OB = OC having centre at O, which is the required circle. Fig. 13.1.1a) To complete the circle by circumference is given finding the centre when a part of a Given: AB is Part of circumference of a circle Steps of Construction: 1, Let C, D, Band F be the four points on the given are AB. 2, Draw chord CD and EF. o 3. Draw PQ as perpendicular bisector a oe of CD and LM as perpendicular bisector of EF oe Fig. 13.13 4. EM and PQ intersect at 0. (O'is equidistant from points A, B, C, D, E and F. 5. Complete the circle with centre O and radius (OA =OB = OC = OD = OE = OF) This will pass through all the points A, B, C, D, E and F on the given part of the circumference. 13.1(iii-b) To complete the circle without finding the centre when a part of its circumference is given Given: AB is the part of circumference of a circle Steps of Construction: 1, Take two chords CD and DE of the suitable same length such that these are chords of AB. 2. Produce CD to D’and DE to E’such that to get the external angle D“DE* 3. Construct. ZEEF = ZD DE" and take mEF = mCD = mDE. Produce EF to F< 4. Construct ZF FG = ZE'EF’ and take FG = mCD. Produce FG to G’ Fig 14 5, Points F and G are on the circumference of the required circle. The dotted ares EF and FG are shown in the figure. 6 Continue this process of extemal angles of equal measure to complete the circumference of the circle as shown in the figure, Note: Constructing internal angles of equal measure, the circumference of the citcle can also be completed.EXERCISE 13.1 1. Divide an are of any length (into two equal parts. (ii) into four equal parts, Practically find the centre of an arc ABC. (If ABI = 3 cm and IBC = 4 cm are the lengths of two chords of an are, then locate the centre of the arc. (ii) TF ABI= 3.5 cm and IBC locate the centre of the arc. ‘om are the lengths of two chords of an are, then For an arc draw two perpendicular bisectors of the chords PQ and QR of this arc, construct a circle through P, Q and R. Describe a circle of radius 5 cm passing through points A and B, 6 cm apart. Also find distance from the centre to the line segment AB. If ABI = 4 cm and IBCI = 6 cm, such that AB is perpendicular to BC, construct a circle through points A, B and C. Also measure its radius. 13.2 CIRCLES ATTACHED TO POLYGONS 13.2) Circumscribe a circle about a given triangle. Given: Triangle ABC. Steps of Construction: Draw LVN as perpendicular bisector of side AB. Daw 7R: a perpendicular bisector of side AC. EN and PR intersect at point 0, With centre O and radius mOA = mOB = mOC, draw a circle. Fig. 13.2.1 This circle will pass through A, B and C whereas O is the circumcentre of the circumscribed circle. [Remember: The circle passing through the vertices of triangle ABC is known as |circumeircle, its radius as circumradius and centre as circumcentre.13.2(ii)Inscribe a circle in a given triangle: Given: A triangle ABC. Steps of Construction: > a) 1. Draw BE and CF to bisect the angles ABC and ACB respectively. Rays BE and CF intersect each other at point 0. 2. isthe centre of the inscribed circle, ~ 3. From 0 draw OP perpendicular to BC. With centre O and radius OP draw a circle. This citcle is the inscribed circle of triangle ABC. [Remember: A circle which touches the three sides of a triangle internally is known as lincircle, its radius as in-radius and centre as in-ventre. 13.2(iii) Eseribe a circle to a given triangle: Given: A triangle ABC Steps of Construction: 1, Produce the sides AB and AC of ABC. 2. Draw bisectors of exterior angles ABC and ACB. ‘These bisectors of exterior angles meet at [, 3. From [; draw perpendicular on side BC of AABC, Which /,D intersect BC at D. 1,D is the radius of the escribed circle with centre at Jy 4. Draw the circle with radius /,D and centre at J; that will touch the side BC of the AABC externally and the produced sides AB and AC.Eseribed circle: The circle touching one side of the triangle externally and two produced sides internally is called escribed circle (e-circle). The centre of e-circle is called e-centre and radius is called e-radius. 13.2@v) __Circumscribe an equilateral triangle about a given circle Given: A circle with centre 0 of reasonable radius. Steps of Constructio 1. Draw AB, the diameter of the circle for locating, 2, Draw an are of radius m A with centre at A for locating points C and D on the circle. Join O to the points C and D. Draw tangents to the citcle at points B, C and D. These tangents intersect at points E, F and G. Fig. 13.2.4 13.2(v)Inscribe an equilateral triangle in a given circle. 2 Given: A circle with centre at 0. Steps of Construction: 1. Draw any diameter AB of the circle. 2, Draw an are of radius OA from point A. The are cuts the circle at points C and D. Join the points B,C and D to form straight line ¢\ Jy segments BC, CD and BD. Triangle BCD is the tequited inscribed + equilateral triangle Fig. 13.2.5 13.2(vi) Circumscribe a square about a given circle. Given: A circle with centre at 0. Steps of Construction: 1 Draw two diameters PR and QS which bisect each other at right angle. 2, Atpoints P, Q, Rand S draw tangents to the circle. 3. Produce the tangents to meet each other at A, B, C and D. ABCD is the required circumscribed square.13.2(vii) Inscribe a square in a given circle D Giver A circle, with centre at 0. Steps of Construction: 1, Through O draw two diameters AC and BD which bisect each other at CTY right angle. A Cc 2. Join A with B, B with C, C with D, and D with A. ABCD iis the required square inseribed in the circle. B Fig. 13.2.7 13.2(viii) Circumscribe a regular hexagon about a given circle. Given: Steps of Constructio 1 A circle with centre at 0. Draw any diameter AB. 2. From point A draw an arc of radius AO (the radius of the circle), which cuts the circle at points B and F. 3. Join B with O and extend it to meet the circle at E. 4, Join F with O and extend it to meet the circle at C. 5. Draw tangents to the circle at points A, B, C, D, E and F intersecting one another at points P, Q, R, S, Tand U respectively. ‘Thus PQRSTU is the circumscribed regular hexagon. Mathematics 1013.2(ix) Inseribe a regular hexagon in a given circle: Fig. 13.2.9(a) Fig. 13.2.9(b) Given: A circle, with centre at 0, Steps of Construction: 1, Take any point A on the eircle and point with 0. From point A, draw an arc of radius 0A which intersects the circle at point B and F. Join O and A with points B and F. AOAB and AOAF are equilateral triangles therefore ZAOB and ZAOF are of measure 60° i.., mOA = mAB = mAP. 5. Produce FO to meet the circle at C. Join B to C. Since in ZBOC = 60 therefore mBC = mOA. 6, From Cand F, draw arcs of radius OA, which intersect the circle at points D and E. 7, Join Cto D, Dto E and E to F ultimately. We have mOA = mOB = mOC = mOD = mOE = mOF ‘Thus the figure ABCDEF is a regular hexagon inscribed in the circle =—1] EXERCISE 13. 1, Circumscribe a circle about a triangle ABC with sides laBl=6em WBal=3em ICAl = 4om Also measure its circum radius. 2. Inscribe a circle in a triangle ABC with sides IABI=5 cm, IBCl=3 cm, ICAI =3 om, Also measure its in-radius, Escribe a circle opposite to vertex A to a triangle ABC with sides |ABI=6 cm, IBCI= 4 cm, ICAI = 3 cm, Find its radius also. Circumscribe a circle about an equilateral triangle ABC with each side of length 4em. Inscribe a circle in an equilateral triangle ABC with each side of length Sem. Circumscribe and inscribe circles with regard to a right angle triangle with sides, 3em, 4om and Sem, In and around the citcle of radius 4em draw a square. In and around the circle of radius 3.5cm draw a regular hexagon, Circumscribe a regular hexagon about a circle of radius em. ae ee13.3 TANGENT TO THE CIRCLE 13.3(4) To draw a tangent to a given are without using the centre through a given point P: Case (i) When P is the middle point of the are Given: Pis the mid-point of an arc AB. Steps of Construction: 1, Join A and B, to form the chord AB. 2. Draw the perpendicular bisector of chord AB which passes through mid point P of AB and mid point R of AB. 3, At points P construct a right angle TPR, 4. Produce PF in the direction of P beyond point §. Thus TP is the required tangent to the arc AB at point P. Case (ii) When P is at end point of the are Given: P is the end point of are POR Steps of Construction: 1, Take a point A on the are POR. 2, Join the points A and P, 3. Draw perpendicular AS at A which intersects the arc POR at B. 4, Join the points B and P. 5. Draw ZAPD of measure equal to that of ZABP. Figufy 13.3.1 0) 6. Now mZBPD = mZBPA +mZAPD mZBPA + mZABP [v mZAPD = mZABP] 90° ° PD is the required tangent.Case (iii) ): When point P is outside the arc. Fig. 13.3.1 (0) Given: Point P is a line segmetn out side the arc ABC without knowing its centre. Steps of Construction: 1, Join Ato P, AP cuts the are at E, Find mid-point M of AP. Draw a semi circle of radius AMI = (MPI with center at M. Draw perpendicular at point £ which meets the semi circle at D. Draw an arc of radius PDI with P as its center. ‘This arc cuts the given arc ABC at points 7. Join P with T. DAWSON PFO is the required tangent. 13.3(ii-a) To draw a tangent to a circle from a given point P at a given point on the circumference: Given: A circle with the centre O and some rp s point P lies on the circumference. Steps of Construction: 1, Join point P to the centre O, so that OP is the radius of the circle. 2. Draw a line TPS which is perpendicular to the radius OP, ‘TPS is the required tangent to the circle at given point P. Fig. 13.3.2(@)13.3i-b) To draw a tangent to a circle from a given point P which lies outside the circle: Given: A circle with centre 0 and some point P out side the circle, Steps of Construction: 1. Join point P to the centre 0. 2. Find M, the mid point of OP. _ 3. Construct a semi circle on diameter OP, with M as its centre. This semi circle cuts the given circle at T. 4. Join P with T and produce PT on both ¥ sides, then PT is the required tangent. Fig. 13.3.2 (6) 13.3(ii) To draw two tangents to a circle meeting each other at a given angle: Given: A circle with centre O, ZMNS is a given angle Steps of Construction: 1, Take a point A on the circumference of circle having centre O. Join the points O and A Draw ZCOA of measure equal to that of ZMNS. Produce CO to meet the circle at B. mZAOB = 180° ~ mZCOA o ~— 6, Draw AD perpendicular to OA, 4 I oo a _ 7, Draw BE perpendicular to OB. Fig. 13.3.3 oe 8, AD and BE intersect at P. 9, mZAOB + mZAPB = 180°, that is, mZAOB = 180° — mZAPB 10, From step 5 and step 9, we have 180° - mZCOA = 180° - mZAPB => mZCOA = mZAPB => mZAPB=mZMNS (2 mZCOA = mZMNS) ee AP and BP ae the required tangents meeting at the given ZMNS.a) To draw direct or (external) common tangents to equal circles: Fig. 13.3.4 (@) Given: Two circles of equal radii with centres 0 and 0” respectively. Steps of Construction: 1. Join the centres O and O'. 2. Draw diameter AOB of the first circle so that AOB 1 00". 3. Draw diameter A’0'B’ of the second circle so that ''B’ L 00’. 4. Draw AA’ and BB" which are the required common tangents. '13.3(iv-b) To draw transverse or (internal) common tangents to two equal circles: Given: Two equal circles with centres O and Of respectively, Steps of Construction: 1, Toim the centres 0 and 0% 2. Find mid-point M of 00% 3. Find mid-point N of H70% 4, Taking point N as centre and radius equal to mifW, draw a citcle intersecting the circle with centre Oat points P and P’ 5. Draw a line through the points M and P touching the second circle atthe point 0. 6 Draw a line through the points M and P” touching the second circle at the point Q” o> Thus PQ and “PQ” are the required wansverse common tangents to the given 13.3.4 (6) circles.13.3(v-a) To Draw direct or (external) common tangents to (two) unequal circles: Fig. 13.3.5 (@) Given: Two unequal circles with centres 0,0" and radii r, r’(r > 1) respectively. Steps of Construction: 1. Join the points O and 0 2. On diameter 70 construct a new circle with centre M, the mid-point of 00% 3. Draw another circle with centre at O and radius = r — /’, cutting the circle with diameter 00’at P and Q. 4, Produce OP and oO to meet the first citcle at A and B respectively. 5. Draw OA" IQA and OB" NI OB. 6. Join AA’ and BB’ which are the required direct common tangents. 8, ‘Thus AA’ and BB’ are the required common tangents. 13.3(v-b) To draw to transverse or internal common tangents to two unequal circles: g BD ‘ Fig. 13.3.5 6) OP eaeGiven: Two unequal circles with centres 0, 0” and radii r, respectively. Steps of Construction: 1 Join the centres O and O’ of the given circles. 2. Find the mid point M of 00". 3. On diameter 00", construct a new circle with centre M. 4. Draw an other circle with centre at O and radius = r + r’ intersecting the circle of diameter 00’ at P and Q. 5. Join O with P and Q. OP and OD meet the circle with radius r at A and B respectively. 6 Draw OBA and OA"ITB. 2 3 7. Join A with B’ and A’ with B, Thus AB’and A’B are the required transverse common tangents. 13.3(vi-a) To draw a tangent to two unequal touching circles: Case I: Given: Two unequal touching circles with centres O and 0% Steps of Construc 1. Join O with O’and produce GO’to meet the circles at the point A where these circles touch each other. Fig. 1 4 2. ‘Tangent is perpendicular to the line segment OA, 3. Draw perpendicular to OA at the point A which is Fig, case-I the required tangent. Case II: Given: Two unequal touching circles with centres O and 0% Steps of Construction: 1 Join O with 0% OO “intersects the circles at the point LV B where these circles touch each other. See Fig. 2. 2. Tangent is perpendicular to line segment containing the centres of the circles. 3. Draw perpendicular to OO’ at the point B which is the required tangent Fig. case Il Fi 13.3(vi-b) To draw a tangent to two unequal intersecting circles: Given: Two intersecting circles with centres A and B. 13.3.6 (a)Steps of Construction: 1 Take a line segment AB. 2. ‘Draw two circles of radii r and r, (where r > r;) with centres at A and B respectively. 3. Taking centre at A, draw a circle of + radius rr. 4, Bisect the line segment AB at point M. 5. Taking centre at M and radius = mAM = mBM, draw a circle intersecting the circle of radius r - r, at Pand @. 6. Join the point A with P and produce it to meet the circle with centre A at D. Also join A with Q and produce it to meet the circle with centre A at C. * 7. Draw BN parallel to AD, intersecting the Fig, 13.3.6 (6) circle with centre B at T. o 8, Draw a line joining the points D and 7. DT is a common tangent to the given two circles. of 9. Repeat the same process on the other side of AB. CT’is also a common tangent to the given two circles 13.3(vii-a) To draw a circle which touches both the arms of a given angle: Given: An angle ZBAC. Steps of Construction: = 1, Draw AD bisecting ZBAC. 2 2, Take any point £ on AD. > 2 3. Draw ET perpendicular to AC 3 intersecting AC atthe point F. 4, Draw aciele with centre E and radius mEF Fig. 13.3.7 @) ‘This circle touches both the arms of ZBAC.13.3(vii-b) To draw a circle touching two convergent lines and passing through a given point between them: Fig. 133.7 (0) Oe Given: BS and CT are two converging lines Steps of Construction: © 2. Produced BS and produced CT intersect at A > Draw AD bisecting ZBAC. > Take any point Eon AD. — e Draw EF perpendicular to AB. Draw a circle with centre E and radius mEF. oe This circle touches AB and AC. > Draw AP which cuts this circle at the point H. Join E and H. sea > ‘Through P, draw PZ HE intersecting AD at the point 0. rs Draw a new circle with centre O and radius mOP. This circle touches both the lines. 13.3(vii-c) To draw a circle which touches three converging lines Note: Itis not possible to draw a circle touching three converging lines.10. ul ® a iy (iv) w (vi) In an are ABC the length of the chord IBC] = 2 cm. Draw a secant |PBC| = 8 cm, ‘where P is the point outside the arc. Draw a tangent through point P to the arc. Construct a circle with diameter 8 cm. Indicate a point C, 5 cm away from its circumference, Draw a tangent from point C to the circle without using its centre, Construct a circle of radius 2 em, Draw two tangents making an angle of 60° with ‘each other. Draw two perpendicular tangents to a circle of radius 3 em. ‘Two equal circles are at 8 cm apart. Draw two direct common tangents of this pair of circles. Draw two equal circles of each radius 2.4 cm, If the distance between their centres is 6.om, then draw their transverse tangents, Draw two citcles with radii 2.5 em and 3 cm. If their centres are 6.5 cm apart, then draw two direct common tangents. Draw two circles with radii 3.5 cm and 2 cm. If their centres are 6 cm apart, then draw two transverse common tangents Draw two common tangents to two touching circles of radii 2.5 em and 3.5 em, Draw two common tangents to two intersecting circle of radii 3 em and 4 em. Draw circles which touches both the arms of angles (i) 45° (ii) 60°. MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE - 13 Multiple Choice Questions Three possible answers are given for the following questions. Tick (¥) the correct answer. ‘The circumference of a circle is called (@ chord segment (© boundary A line intersecting a circle is called (@ tangent () secant (© chord ‘The portion of a circle between two radii and an arc is called @ sector segment (© chord Angle inscribed in a semi-circle is x ® x @ F ® F © 5 The length of the diameter of a circle is how many times the radius of the circle @ 1 2 © 3 ‘The tangent and radius of a circle at the point of contact are (@) parallel (6) not perpendicular ——_(c) perpendicularCircles having three points in common (a) overlapping (6) collinear (©) notcoincide (viii) If two circles touch each other, their centres and point of contact are (a) coincident (b) non-collinear © collinear (ix) The measure of the external angle of a regular hexagon is @ § » F o € (x) If the incentre and circumcentre of a triangle coincide, the triangle is (a) anisoscenes (b) aright triangle (ec) ancquilateral (xi) The measure of the external angle of a regular octagon is @ § o § © § (xii) Tangents drawn at the end points of the diameter of a circle are (a) parallel (®) perpendicular (co) Intersecting (xiii) The lengths of two transverse tangents to a pair of circles are (a) unequal @®) equal (©) overlapping (xiv) How many tangents can be drawn from a point outside the circle? (a) 1 () 2 (©) 3 (xv) _ If the distance between the centers of two circles is equal to the sum of their radii, then the circles will (a) intersect (6) donot intersect (c) touch each other externaly (xvi) If the two circles touches externally, then the distance between their centers is equal tothe (@) difference of their radii (6) sum of their radii (©) product of their radii (xvii) How many common tangents can be drawn for two touching circles? (a) 2 ) 3 fw 4 (xviii) How many common tangents can be drawn for two disjoint circles? (a) 2 @) 3 wo 4 2. Write short answers of the following questions (i) Define and draw the following geometric figures: (a) The segment of a circle (6) The tangent to a circle. (©) The sector of a circle. (@) The inscribed circle. (e) The circumscribed circle. ” The escribed circle. (ii) The length of each side of a regular octagon is 3 cm. Measure its perimeter. (iii) Write down the formula for finding the angle subtended by the side of a n-sided polygon at the centre of the circle, ‘The length of the side of a regular pentagon is 5 cm what is its perimeter?3. Fillin the blanks (The boundary of a circle is called = (i) The circumference of a circle is called of the circle. Gii) The line joining the two points of circle is called Giv) The point of intersection of perpendicular bisects of two non-parallel chords of a circle is called the () Circles having three points in common will (vi) The distance of a point inside the circle from its centre is___than the radius. (vii) The distance of a point outside the circle from its centre is_ than the radius. (viii) A circle has only _ centre. (ix) One and only one circle can be drawn through three. ___ points, (8) Angle inscribed in a semi-circle is a___ angle. (xi) If two circles touch each other, the point of and their: are collinear. (xii) Iftwo circles touch each other, their point of contact and centres are __ (xiii) From a point outside the circle _tangents can be drawn, (xiv) A tangent is to the radius of a circle at its point of contact. (xv) The straight line drawn to the radius of a circle is called the __to the circle. (xvi) Two circles can not cut each other at more than ___ points. (xvii) The L-bisector of a chord of a circle passes through the (xviii) The length of two direct common tangents to two citcles ate _to each other. (xix) The length of two transverse common tangents to two circles are ____ to each other. (xx) Ifthe in-centre and circum-centre of a triangle coincide the triangle is, (xxi) Two intersecting circles are not__. (xxii) The centre of an inscribed circle is called (xxiii) The centre of a circumscribed circle is called (xxiv) The radius of an inscribed circle is called (xxv) The radius of a circumscribed circle is called SSR FN A circle of any radius can be traced by rotating a compass about fixed point. The perpendicular bisectors of two non-parallel chords of a circle intersect at a point which is known as centre of circle. A circle can be drawn through given three non-collinear points. When a part of circumference of a circle is given, the circle can be completed. Ifa triangle, the circumscribed circle, inscribed circle and escribed circle opposite to ‘each vertex can be constructed. If a circle is given, then the circumscribed and inscribed equilateral triangles can be constructed. Fora given circle, the circumscribed and inscribed squares can be drawn,constructed. ‘We can draw tangents (0 a given arc as its mid point, its any end point, and a point not on the are. Tangents can be drawn to a given circle, when a point is an its circumference and from a point outside the circle. Tangents to two unequal touching circles can be traced. Direct or transverse common tangents of two equal circles or two unequal circles can be drawn, ‘We can construct a circle touching the arms of a given angle. A circle passing through a given point between two converging lines and touching ‘each of them, can be traced,@ ii) w) a Gy) @ (dv) (wii) &) @ (iv) (wii) (ix) fea (216, 729) {6} quadratic, x? + 4x—14=0 quadratic, 4x7 + 4x—1=0 @ ales (arn .pa+D} (£1, 14-42) quadratic, 7x? - 3x+7=0 120 quadratic, x2 + 29x + 66=0 3 wi) Gai) wi) Gx)13. 16. {0-1}, 14. (2,4) 15. {1,3,2£)33) (425.7) EXERCISE 1.4 a2 } 2. (1), @exancous) 3, 3}. 1 Exwaneous) {7}, (12 Extraneous) 5. {4} 6. GB) 7. oor {} (or cseraraneony 9, FEMS yo (2898 1 pa.0) MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 1 Multiple choice questions: o ® w @ Gi) © ww @ ” © wd ©) (vil) (@) (viii) (©) @® @ Short answers: @ -14¥3 @o3 (iil) 3x2 2-48 = 0 Gv) (@) Factorization (b) Completing square (c) Quadratic formula = wo wi) 3,6 Fill in the blanks: @) at+bxte=0 (ii) Completing square o &e (vi) Exponential (vii) (£3) (viii) Reciprocal (ix) Extraneous (x) Radical sign (emma ea EXERCISE 2.1 ® 7 @ 8 Gi) 0 G 8 @ real, rational and unequal, x= 8,15 Gi). imaginary, x= real and equal,(il) w) @ a) @ a) @ @ -1,-@, -0? -3, 30, 30? w) (wi) 128 128 EXERCISE 2.2 i) Gv) 1024 i) 2 (ii) EXERCISE 2.3 Gi) (iv) wid) i) Gi) w Gi Gi) EXERCISE 2.4 gp? - 24) 2 a 1 w ii) lon? — 2in} 2, 2ea, 2a? 4,40, 40? 125 (wy 4 6 (vii)EXERCISE 2.5 1 (a) P= 6r4+5=0 (bt) P- 13 +36=0 (9 Boxe (d) 43x=0 () xP +4x-12= (xP +8x+7=0 ® i) 2 6r+ 2 (a) (b) 2 +3x4+36=0 (©) (d) 2+x+2=0 (e) 3 @ Pa G@ta2g)xegt=0 — ) ge——pt-2x+q=0 EXERCISE 26 L wo Gi) OG) =4x2- 12431; R=-78 Gi) 2. @ Gi) Aso ii) 3. a 4. i) 6,24 (ii) 5, @ 3-113 Gi) 4-213 EXERCISE 27 1 (4,D,6,1D} 2 {0,1 5,-8)} 7-7 fa-b a-b 3 {@.-5), G. 2 4 {ee 0 (54, +54) 5 {€3,2),C1,-2)} 6 (1,32) 7 {@2,43)} 8 {42,42} 9 (e1.4} 10 DEAavc.-y}13,14 4,5,6. 3 12 5. 4-4 6 81 G, 6), (6,3) & xsSye4 9 LT 25cm by 15 em or 15 cm by 25 em MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 2 Multiple choice questions: @ © (i) ) Gi) ) @) @ © @ wi) ) Gi) ©) (ill) (©) Gy @) @ © (di) @) (di) (a) (xiii) (©) (xiv) @) ow @ aw) @ Short questions: i) (@) imaginary (©) (real) irrational, unequal (i) wre wi) 0 (vii) 64 (ix) Q@)=37 +5x410, R= 22 (B) (eal) rational, unequal (@) (real) rational equal jw 1 (ili) 24+3x+9=0 (a) Sum=—34 Product = 7 39 13 87 Git) @ Fe) -g OG (iil) real Gv) imaginary win -2 vit) $ wo @ (ii) 1.2 .. 10 ey 2 (xiv) (a) 2 +5x+7=0 (6) 2-10x+28=0 Fill in the blanks: @ =4ac Gi) equal (vy) rational (vi) irrational ww 3 (xiii) zero (xiv) w (vi) 242e44=0 (xv) P= (a+ Ax + aB=0EXERCISE 3.1 L @ ® iy 16148 i) 2 @ 3. 4:5 5. = . 7 x=2) 8. Rs. 400 9. 10. @ 7 Gi) 9bx (iii) 40 MW @ x2 Gi) rst ii) x=38 (iv) x=p?=q? W ox=4 EXERCISE 3.2 Lo @ ys4r Gi) y=20 Gi) x=7 2 @ yaks Gi) x=15,y=42 3 OR 37.R=40,7=32 4. 6. w= 33, w= 375 7. 354 9 waWwas 10. 135 mR vale, B EXERCISE 33 L @® i) 90 wy SSS 2 —poa Gy) Gaye ye 2y)? OD) Rpg e 2 i oa ii) xt (iii) 146? (iv) 5x3 W) p-@ Wi) PP -pat e @ £30 Gi) F105 Git) E4Sp2ghs @v) 2@-») 4 @) pais (i) x22 Gi) p=84 (iv)2 @ 2 @w 2 w “2 Gv) See wo 2 wi) real (ii) 2 [F ceurncousroo0, 90} (viii) {2p, 2p} Gx) 7} EXERCISE 3.5, 142 28 1, 49 38 2 Lose 2 waggu%. > 3 yet F Te 2b Tye 14 13S 5 4 wags, 5 eg 6 wag EXERCISE 3.7 1. @ A=48 Sq. Units (i 1=2 2 S=4m®,r=3 3. @ $=2.5in (i) F= 1616 4 T=45ep 5. d=20ft 6 Rs.297000 7 1=20ft 8. p=12hp 9. 968000 MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 3 1. Multiple choice questions: @ @) Gi) © Gi) ) dv) @) “™ © (vi) (@) (wii) @ (viii) (b) Gx) @) (x) (a) (xi) (co) (xii) (b) (xiii) (a) (xiv) @), (xv) (a) 2. Short Questions: wi) x=10 vi) yatd (viii) v=2 (x) @® +28 wy 4 , 18 Gxii) (xiii) z= 6xy Giv) 2 3. Fillin the blanks: @ Ss (i) Antecedent (iii) Consequent (iv) Extremes (¥) Means Wi) pad (iil) m=8 (ili) by @® |9 4 Sx— 2) Se+3) 71+ 6 2 3 Bred *xe1 t+ DE 3 x42” (42? 13 * 20+ 1) 20 +2) 5. a2, 3 13x +3) * 1302+ 4) 1 xo? 3@+1) 302=x+1) 1 x 4x Per errrsyy 1 axnl B. 2x44 A +x) 4Q2 +1) 7202 + 1? wil) 2 +6 aan EXERCISE 4.1 6 5 Bel EXERCISE 4.2 2 1 1 2 52+ Gs ess 142 4 xel-g-pty 1 1 & Fee) ae) * Be 1 1 1 4-1)” 4+ 1D” 204 1? EXERCISE 4.3 x+12 540 17x-6 52+ 1)~ 1 2(e +2) * 207 +4) 2 x+l 3@+D *302-x4D 2. EXERCISE 4.4 1 x GD t+ 1 x41 x+1 4@-1) 402 +1) * 2042) 2.4 4 5 yar ae 1 @) (©) Gi) © Gil) () dv) @) Ww) (vi) (e) (vii) (b) (wii) (a) (ix) (b) WMO 45 2 Weates Corr win3(4 sh) oii yar wos] covets mien Cree EXERCISE 5.1 1 @ (1,2.4,5,7,9} a) (4,9 Gi) (1,2,4,5,7,9) dv) {4,9} 2 @ YUU3I7) Gi) YU(3,17) Gil) (2,3,5,7, 11) Gv) (2,3.5,7, 11) 3 @ YUCRIT) Gi Gi) ¥ ww @ wo @ wi) 4. @)— (18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25) Gi) (18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25} Gi) (4,5, ++, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, +, 25) (iv) (4,5, +, 10,12, 14, 15, 16, 18, +, 25) 5. @ — {2,6, 10, 14, 18} Gi) {24} 6. OQ @ Gi) (0) EXERCISE 5.2 1 @— (0,1,2,3, 20,23) Gi) (0,1,2,3,--, 20,23) Gil) ww) © () (1,2,3,5,7, 19) Gi) (12,35, 7,019} (vii) (3,5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19) (vill) (3,5, 7, 11, 13,17, 19) EXERCISE 5.4 1 AXB = {(a, 0), (a, d), (b, ©), (b, d)} BxA = {(c.4), (cb), (4,4), (4. b)} 2. AXB = {(0,-1), 0.3), 2,1), 2,3), 4,1, 4, 3)} ellaneous Exercise 4 = (C1, 0), C1, 2), CL, 4), B, 0), 3, 2), 3, 4)} 6 2x x Bel e+AXA = ((0, 0), , 2), (0, 4), 2, 0), (2, 2), (2, 4), 4, 0), (4, 2), 4, 4)) BXB = ((-1,-1), 1, 3), G,-1), 3, 3)) 3 @ a=6, b=3 Gi) a 4 X= {a,b.e,d}; Y= {a} @® 6 Gi) 6 Gil) 9 EXERCISE 5.5 Be " {(, 3), (6,4), (©, 3)} {(a, 4), (, 3), (6, 4)} {G, a), 4,a)} {G, b), 4, b), 3,0, 4,0) (2, - 1), 1, 2), (2,29), Rie 2) Range R; = (2, 1, 2} {20,0 D. C2, 20: R= (2,1), Range R: = (1, 2} 3 {@.a),(a,d) R= (G0. (60) {(@,d), (bg) + R= {(a,f, (b, 6), DY {de GN} + Rs = {€¢, 6), GD, (8 8)} 2 Ri = (B, 2), 4,2), 8, 2,4, 9), 8, 39} i) Rr = (2.2,0,3),6,5} (1,5), 8, 3), 4, 2)) Gv) Ry = (0.3),,5),6,9)) 6 — @)__ Bijective Dom Ri= {1,2,3,4}, RangeR; = {1,2,3,4} Gi) Relation Dom Ri= {1,23} Range Ry = (1,2,4,5} Gi) Function Dom Rs= (b,c. d}, Range Rs = {a} (iv) Onto function Dom Ry= (1, 2,3,4,5}, Range Ry = (1,3, 4} (v) One-one function Dom Rs= {a,b,c.d). Range Rs = (a,b, d,e)(vi) Relation Dom Re= {1,2,3}, (vii) One-one function Dom Rr= {1,3,5}, (viii) Relation Dom Rs= (1,3,7}, MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 5 Range Re = (2, 3,4} Range Ry = {p,7, 5} Range Rs = (a,b, c) 1 MCQ's (i) © i) @ di) © dy &) Ww oo © wi) @ wi) © ® &H W @ wi) ©) Gi) © iii) @) GV) @ oY) ©) Gv) ) Gi) vil) © GN OXY) © 2. Short Questions: @ Def. Ex. A=(1,2,3),B=(1,2,3,4,5}. Aisa subset of B. Gi) {a}, {b}, {a,b} ® @ AnBy=VUR (i) AUBY = AOR 3. Fillin the Blanks: @® 8B Gi) Disjoint sets (il) A=B fy) ANBYVANG &) ALBAAVO wi) 6 (wi) U (viii) (ou @ A\B (xi) Ind quadrant (xii) [Vth quadrant (xiii) Zero (xiv) Zero @w) {a,b,c} (vi) {a,b,c} (vii) John Venn (xviii) Binary relation (xix) onto (x) not Cece EXERCISE 6.1 4 Classes | 2—3 | a—s | 67 | s—9 | to—11 | 1213 | ais Frequency | 2 ito Ts 6 5 3 a) 6—7 b) 4— EXERCISE 6.2 3. @245 i) 290 4 @245 i) 290 5 325 6 AM=9.620 GM=8.553 HM = 8.089HM = 8.089 . ‘Median = 10.625 Mode = 13.5 10. (i) Weighted Mean = 74 marks a 11, Weighted Mean = 41.15 rupees per litre 12 2001 [2002 [2003 [2004 [2005 [2006 [2007 | 2008 | 2009 | 2010 113.33 [126 [142.66 | 159.33 [178 _ | 195.33 | 208.67 | 220 EXERCISE 6.3 4, Range =3500 SD. = 1417.86 5. a (i) SD.=487 (ii) SD.=3.87 b- Variance = 6.85 6. SD. =3.136 7 MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISE 6 1 i) (b) Gai) (b) Gili) (@) (iv) (©) (y) >) (wi) (a) (vii) (a) (viii) (@) Gx) (6) (©) (xi) (b) (xii) (a) (xiii) (c) (xiv) (c) (xv) (a), (xvi) (a), (xvii) (b) (xviii) (b) (xix) (a), (xx) (b) (xi) @), (xxii) (©) Introduction to Tri ura EXERCISE 7.19.(a) LL (45° Gi) 60.5083" iii) 125.3805° ().47°21°36" Gi) 125°27" iti) 25°45’ iv) -22°30" (wv) -67°3.4748"” (vi) 315°10%48” z 5 3x Sx limplies that [Conesp [Corresponding F [degree [Det [Definition Z minute or foot ext exterior Ww [second or inch ig Figure fem [centimeter ler lit and only if = nearly equal to Iso. sosceles = is congruent to [Mid pt. [Middle point lo [corespondence lpexp Perpendicular la® [Triangles prob [Problem fe [ateater than or equal to [Quad. [Quadrilateral IE less than or equal to [Rect [Rectangle bet fight angle [Rhmb [Rhombus la [Triangle Isa [Square n lis perpendicular to lsttine [Straight tine i lis parallel to [ra [Theorem li gm [parallelogram [Trap [Trapezium jo eircte lvext opp. [Vertically opposite lo" circumference IQED __ [Quod Erat Demonstramdum AB lare AB le [Theta (angle measure) lag line segment AB. lo lomega lo [phiTABLE OF LOGARITHM 0|1/2|3 /|4|5/6/7|8|9 |123|456|789 ‘10 |000/o043/o086|o128[0170 13 [17 21 26 [30 34 38 {021210253} 0294103340374 42 |1620 24 | 28 32 36 71 [OaTal0453|0402)0557)0569 12 |1519 23 [27 3135 lo607|0645}068210719)0755| 11|15 19 22 | 26 30 33 Table of LogarithmTABLE OF LOGARITHM 0|1/2/3|4/5/6|7/|8 |9 |[123|456|789 '50 |6990)6998|7007]7016|7024|7033|7042|7050| 7059|7067| 4.2 3/3 45|67 8 +51 |7076|7084|7093|7101|7110|7118|7126|7135] 714317152| 1 2 3|3 4 5|67 8 52 |7160|7168|7177|7185|7193|7202|7210|7218| 7226|7235| 1 2 2| 3 4 5| 6 7 7 583 |7243|7251|7259|7267|7275|7284|7292|7300| 7308|7316| 1 2 2| 3 4 5| 6 6 7 54 |7324|7332|7340|7348||7356) 7364] 7372|7380|7388|7396| 1 2 2|3 4 5| 6 6 7 55 |7404|7412|7419|7427|7435|7443| 7451|7459| 7466|7474| 1 2 2| 3 4 5| 5 6 7 56 |7482|7490|7497|7505|7513|7520|7528|7536| 75437551 1 2 2| 3 4 5| 5 6 7 57 |7559|7566|7574|7582|7589|7597|7604|7612| 7619|7627| 1 2 2| 3 4 5| 5 6 7 58 |7634|7642|7649|7657|7664|7672|7679|7686| 7694|7701| 1 1 2| 3 4 4| 5 6 7 ‘59 |7709|7716|7723|7731|7738) 7745|7752|7760|7767|774| 1 1 2|3 4 4| 5 67 60 |7782|7789]7796|7803|7810) 7818|7825|7832|7839|7e46| 1 1 2|3 4 4| 56 6 61 |7853]7860|7868|7875|7882|7889|7896|7903| 7910|7917| 1 1 2| 3 4 4| 5 6 6 62 |7924|7931]7938|7945| }7966|7973] 7980|7987| 1 12/3 34/566 63 |7993|8000]8007|8014| }2035|8041] s0as|g055| 11 2/3 34/556 64 |8062|8069]8075|8082| lsto2|stos|stielsizz| 1 12/3 34/556 65 |8129|8136)8142\8149| leteo|8176|ste2|s189| 1 12/3 34/556 6 |8195|8202]8200|8215| \s235|e241)azaalezs4 11 2/3 34/556 67 |8261|8267)8274|8280| jaz9o|aso6asizjas1o] 1 12/3 34/556 68 |8325|8331/8338|8344| }a363|8370] 376la3e2] 1 12/3 34/456 69 |388|8395] 2401]8407| }s426|e432|saaoleaas| 112/23 4/ 456 70 |8451|8457)8463|8470| |s488|84o4) ssoolasos| 112/23 4/456 71 {a513]8519|8525|8531 ja5aa|asss) sseilase7| 1 12/23 4/455 72 |8573|8579) 8585] 8591| la6oo|a615) s62iaez7| 112/23 4/455 73 |8633|8639]8645| 8651| }a6eo|8675) sesilacss| 112/23 4/455 74 |8692|8698)8704|8710} \sz27|e733)s73ele745| 1 12/23 4/455 75 |8751|8756)8762|768| \s7a5|8791)s797\s802| 1 12/23 3/455 76 |8808|8814]8820|8825| }ae42|eeaa|sasaleaso| 11 2/2 33/455 77 |865|8871/2876|8882| |a899|s904 so1oasis| 112/23 3/445 78 |8921|8927)8932|8939| }s954|a960]a96s|a971 1 12/233) 445 79 |8976|a982|8987|8993| }9009|9015)s020]9025] 1 12/23 3/445 ‘80 |9031|9036]9042|047| !9063|9069)s074I9079| 1 12/2 33/445 81 |9085|2090|5096|9101 9117/9122\9128/9133] 1 12/23 3/445 82 |9138|9143]9149|0154| |9170|9175/st809186| 1 12/23 3/445 83 |9191|9196| 9201|9206| }9222/9227)9232|9238| 1 12/2 33/445 84 |9243|9248)9253|9258| |a274|9279) 928492891 1 1 2/233) 445 85 |3294|9299]9304|9309| 19325|9330/9335]9340 1 12/23 3/445 186 |9345|9350)9355|9360| 19375|9380|9385]9300| 1 1 2/2 33/445 87 |9395|9400]9405|9410| }9425|9430)435]94400 14/2 23/3 44 ‘88 |9445|9450]9455|9460| lo474|9479) 4galoasa|0 11/2 23/344 £89 |9494|9499]9504|9509| 1952/9528) 9533]9538 0 1 1| 2 2 3| 3 4 4 90 }9542|9547/9552|9557| 19571/9576|958i]ose6] 0 11/2 23/344 91 |9590/9595|9600]9605| 19619|9624) 9628]9633/0 1 1| 2 23|3 44 92 |9638|9643)9647|9652| \9666|9671)9675]9680|0 1 1| 2 23|3 44 93 |9685|9689] 9694] 699| lsrss|g7t7/9722\9727|0 11/2 23/344 94 |9731|9736] 9741|9745| \9759|9763) 9768]9773|0 1 1| 2 23|3 44 95 |9777\9782|9786|9791| 305]9Boa|set4jasis) 0 11/2 23/34 4 ‘96 |9823|9827]9832|9836| }9850|9854) 9a5s|o863|0 1 1| 2 23|3 44 97 |9868|9872|9877|s881| 19894|9899] 9903/9908] 0 1 1| 2 23| 3 44 98 |9912|9917)9921]9926| }9939|9943) 994a]9952|00 11/2 23/344 99 |9956| 9964) 9965] 969| 19983|9987] 9991/9096] 0 1 1| 2 2 3| 33 4 ui Mathematic 8TABLE OF ANTILOGARITHM 0/1|2/3 8/9/123/456|789 ‘00 |1000|1002|1005) 700 Forstoz| 00 T[ 1 11/222 .01 {1023 }1026 027] 103 104g}1045 0.011 111/222 ‘02 1047 }1050 [1052 108 4067/1069] 001] 111/222 ‘03 |1072|1074 1076) 107 1091|1094 0014/4 14/222 :04 1096 1099 102, 1104] ini7|1itg]} 004) 112/222 205 [1122 1125 127 |1130] 143| 1146, 011] 112/22 2 106 |1148 1151 1153 |1156| tea] 1172] 014) 112/222 -07 [1475 178 180 |1183} is7| 1199] 0.11) 112/222 +08 |1202|1208 | 1209 1211 11225] 12240 11/1 12/223 109 |1230 1235 | 1231 12531256 0 11/1 12/22 3 ‘0 [12591262 | 1268 12811285 01111 12/22 3 ‘M1 |1288 1291 | 1294] 4312/1315] 0 11/1 22/223 12 13181321 o0114/122/223 113 [13491352 0114/122/233 ‘14 |1380|1384| 014/122/233 15 [1413 [416 014/122/233 ‘46 [14451449 014/122/233 ‘47 [14791483 o0114/122/233 8 |1514|1517 0114/122/233 ‘19 [15491552 014/122/333 ‘20 [1585/1589 0114/122/333 21 {16221626 0114/222/333 '22 |1660|1663 0114/222/333 23 |1698 1702 0114/222/334 (24 |1738|1742 014/222/334 25 |178|1782 014/222/334 26 |1820 [1824 014/223/334 (27 [1862/1866 0114/223/334 28 |1905|1910 0114/223/344 29 {1950 1954 011/223/344 :30 [19952000 0114/223/344 ‘31 [20a poae 014/223/344 32 [2089 os4 011/223/344 ‘33 fo13ele143 014/223/344 ‘34 [e138 e193 112/233/445 :35 [2239 fp2aa| 112/233/445 '36 [2291 296 112/233/445 ‘37 [e3aa [e350 112/233/445 38 [2399 40a 112/233/445 '39 feass e460 112/233/455 ‘40 (25122518 112/234/455 ‘41 [2570 576 | 112/234/455 “42 [2630 636 112/234/456 “43 [2692 698 112/3 34/456 “44 fa7salere1 112/334/456 “45 [818 925 112/334/556 “48 [284 e801 112/334/556 “47 f2951 958 112/334/556 “48 [3020 027 4112/3 44/566 -49 [30903097 112/3 44/566 Table of Logarithm GeeTABLE OF ANTILOGARITHM 0/1/2(3|4/5/6/7/8/9|123 “50 [3162)3170|3177|3164]3192|5199|3206|3214]3221|5228| 51 |3236|3243]3251|3258|3266|3273| 3281|3289|3296) 3304] ‘52 |3311|3319|3327/3334[3342|3350|3357/3365|3373|3381 “53 |3388)3396|3404|3412|3420|3428|3436|3443) 34518459 '54 |3467|3475|3483] 3491|3499|3508|3516|3524|3532|3540| '55 |3548|3556|3565] 3573)3581|3589|3597|3606|3614|3622| “56 |3631)3639|3648|3656|3664|3673|3681|3690| 3698|3707| 57 |3715|3724|3733] 3741]3750|3758|3767|3776|3784|3793| :58 |3802|3811]3819|3828 3837|3846|3855|3864|3873|3882| '59 |3890|3899|3908] 3917)3926|3936|3945|3054|3963|3972| 60 |3981/3990|3999|4009|4018|4027|4036|4046| 4055) 4064| ‘61 |4074|4083|4093) 4102]4111 4121 |4130|4140|4150 14159 162 |4169|4178|4188] 4198)4207|4217|4227|4236| 4246|4256| 163 |4266|4276|4285|4295|4305)4315|4325|4335) 4345) 4355| 164 |4365|4375/4385| 4395|4406|4416| 4426) 4436|4446|4457 165 |4467|4477|4487] 4498) 4508|4519|4529|4539|4550|4560| <66 |4571/4581|4592|4603/4613|4624| 463414645) 4656|4667| 67 |4677|4688|4699] 4710)4721]4732|474214753|4764|4775| “68 |4786|4797|4808|4819/4831|4842| 485314864) 4875|4887| 69 |4898/4909|4920|4932|4943|4955|4966|4977|4989|5000| 70 |5012|5023|5035) 5047)5058|5070|5082/5093|5105|5117| 71 |5129|5140|5152] 5164|5176|5188|5200|5212|522415236| 72 |5248|5260|5272| 5284)5297|5309|5321/5333|5346|5359| “73 |5370)5383|5395|5408/5420|5433|5445|5458|5470|5483| 74 |5495|5508)5521|5534|5546/5559| 5572|5585|5598|5610 75 |5623|5636|5649| 5662|5675|5689] 5702)5715|5728|5741 “76 |5754|5768|5781|5794|5808|5821|5834|5849| 5861|5875| 77 |5888|5902|5916] 5929|5943|5957|5970|5984|5998|6012| 78 |6026|6039|6053}6067|6081|6095|6109|6124|6138|6152| “79 |6166/6180|6194|6209|6223|6237|6252|6266| 6281|6295| 80 |6310|6324|6339]6353)6368|6383|6397/6412|6427\6442| ‘81 |6457|6471|6486]6501]6516|6531|6546|6561|6577|6592| ‘82 |6607|6622|6637/6653]6668|6683|6699/6714|6730|6745| 83 |6761/6776|6792|6808|6823|6839|6855|6871|6887|6902| ‘84 |6918|6934) 6950| 6966|6982/6998| 7015|7031|7047|7063| 85 |ro79|7096|7112|7129}7145|7161|7178|7194|7211|7228 “86 |7244|7261|7278|7295|7311|7328 |7345|7362|7379|7396| 87 |7413|7430|7447] 7464] 7482|7499|7516|7534|7551|7568| 88 |7586|7603|7621|7638|7656|7674| 7691|7709| 7727|7745| 89 |7762|7780|7798|7816|7834|7852|7870|7889| 7907|7925| 90 |7343|7962|7980] 7998|8017|8035|8054|8072|2091|8110| .91 |8128|8147|3166]8185/8204|8222|8241/8260|8279|8299| ‘92 |8318/8337|8356|8375/8305|8414|8433|8453|8472\8492| -93 |8511|8531 8551 8570/8590|8610|8630|8650|8670|8690| ‘94 |8710|8730]8750|8770|8790/8810| 8831|8851|8872|8892 .95 |8913|8933|8954|8974|8995|9016|9036|9057) 9078] 9099| “96 |9120/9141|9162|9183|920419226| 9247/9268) 929019311 97 |9333|9354|9376] 9397/9419|9441|462/9484|9506|9528| -98 |9550)9572|9594|9616|9638|9661|9683|9705|9727|9750| :99 |9772|9795|9817|9840|9863|9886|9908|9931|9954|9977| 63) —__— Mathematics 10° a a a © 000882 2BVIIII aaa a0naKuGe|N © 000 02222G~NIANO9900|0 ZPewoevwsaee i+ oO} 101213 11214 111214 111314 111315, 121315 121315 121416 121416 13.1416 13.1517 13.1517 141517 141618 141618 151719 151719 151720 16 1820 16 1820 ©0000 2HOGONINNANDDODOGDOAMAGAMATTRDDARRDRRD PISSRSRNALAASS SS ow 00 emmaaarioomaa0oonMmaaaa 3 OO OOO WO OS TIIIIIO ODD OMADUATTATATE DARD DARD RUUOUUEOD ORR RRR RRR R RRO OOO 6 WOU WOOO U URN NNN NNN NNN NNN RN NNNNNOGLOSSARY (Ea ‘An equation which contains the square of the unknown (variable) quantity, but no higher power, is called a quadratic equation or an equation of the second degree. Second degree _A second degree equation in one variable x, is ax? + bx +c =0, equation @#0 and a, b, ¢ are constants is called the general or standard form of a quadratic equation, Where a is the co-efficient of °, b is the General or co-efficient of x and constant term is ¢. standard form Reciprocal ‘An equation is said to be a reciprocal equation, if it remains equation: unchanged, when «is replaced by 2 Exponential In exponential equations variable occurs in exponent. ‘equations: Radical equation: An equation involving expression under the radical sign is called a radical equation. Ci Discriminant: The expression “b? - 4ac” of the quadratic expression ax? + bx + cis called Discriminant. Cube roots: ‘The cube roots of unity are 1, @ and 0”. Complex cube Complex cube roots of unity are and 3 roots: Properties of (a) The product of thtee cube roots of unity is one, ie, cube roots of () (@) (@)= 03 = 1 unity , (6) Each of the complex cube roots of unity is reciprocal of the other. (©) Each of the complex cube roots of unity is the square of the other. () The sum of all the cube roots of unity is zero, ie., 14o+0%=0 Roots of the ‘The roots of the quadratic equation ax? + bx+c=0, a40 are quadratic xb +b" = dae be ani equation 2a‘Symmetric functions: Formation of a quadratic equation as: Synthetic division: Simultaneous equations: Proportion: Direct variation Inverse variation ‘Theorem on proportions: ‘The sum and the product of the roots of a quadratic equation avp=2 and op=£ Symmetric functions of the roots of a quadratic equation are those functions in which all the roots involved are alike, so that the value of the expression remains unaltered, when roots are interchanged. 22 (sum of the roots) x + product of the roots = 0 = P= (at f)x+ of: ‘Synthetic division is the process of finding the quotient and remainder, ‘when a polynomial is divided by a linear polynomial. A system of equations f (x, y) = 0 and g (x, y) = 0 having a common solution is called a system of simultaneous equations. A relation between two quantities of the same kind is called ratio, A proportion is a statement, which is expressed as equivalence of two ratios. If two ratios a: b and c : d are equal, then we can write @ 4 4 If two quantities are related in such a way that when one changes in any ratio so does the other is called direct variation. If two quantities are related in such a way that when one quantity increases, the other decreases is called inverse variation. (1) Theorem of Invertendo Wa:b=e:dthenb:a=d:c (2) Theorem of Alternando Wa:b=c:d,thena:c= G3) Theorem of Componendo if a:b=e:d, then @ atbibsctded (i) a:atb=crctd 4) Theorem of Dividendo If a:b=e:d,thenTheorem of Componendo-dividendo Ie a:b=e:d, then atb:a-b=c+d:e-d A combination of direct and inverse variations of one or more than one variables forms joint variation Joint variation: K-Method: wo $28 Then k=$=5 =kb and c= kd en k= eaS and c It then a=bk, c=dkand e=fk Fraction: A fraction is an indicated quotient of two numbers or algebraic expressions. Equation: ‘An equation is equality between two expressions Identity: ‘An identity is an equation which is satisfied by all the values of the variables involved Rational NG) ce ‘An expression of the form Bo where N(x) and D(x) are polynomials in x with real coefficient, is called a rational fractional. Every fractional expression can be expressed as a quotient of two polynomials, Proper rational No proper A tational fraction BO | with D(x) #0 is called a proper rational ‘fraction if degree of the polynomial N(x), in the numerator is less than the degree of the polynomial D(x), in the denominator. hh N@) Improper gna action 2, ih De) #05 elle an improper ation degree of the polynomial N(x) in the numerator is greater or equal to the degree of the polynomial D(a) in the denominator. Partial fractions: N@ attractions: Decomposition of resultant fraction yay. whenSet Union of sets Intersection of sets Difference of sets: ‘Compliment: Closed figures: Specific order: Ordered pairs: Binary Relation: Function: irst elements & second elements: Into function, (a) denominator D(x) consists of non-tepeated linear factors. (b) denominator D(x) consists of repeated linear factors. (©) denominator D(x) contains non-repeated irreducible quadratic factor. (d) denominator D(x) has repeated quadratic factor. A set is the well defined collection of distinct objects with some common properties, Union of two sets A and B denoted by A U B is the set containing elements which either belong to A or to B or to both. Intersection of two sets A and B denoted by A B is the set of common elements of both A and B. In symbols AB ={x:Vxe Aand.xe B). The set difference of B and A denoted by B — A is the set of all those elements of B but do not belonging to A Complement of a set A w.r. universal set U is denoted by AS = A’ = U~A contains all those elements of U which do not belong to A British mathematician John Venn (1834 - 1923) introduced rectangle for a universal set U and its subsets A and B as closed figures inside this, rectangle, ‘An ordered pair of elements is written according to a specific order for which the order of elements is strictly maintained. Cartesian product of two non empty sets A and B denoted by Ax B consists of all ordered pairs (x, y) such that V.x€ A and V ye B. Suppose A and B are two non empty sets then relation f: A Bis called a function if (i) Dom f= set A (ii) every x € A appears in one and only ordered pair € f. Suppose A and B are two non empty sets then relation f: A Bis called a function if (i) Dom f= set A (ii) V x.€ A we can associate some unique image clement y=fix) € B. Dom fis the set consisting of all first elements of each ordered pair © f and range fis the set consisting of all second elements of each ordered paire f, ‘A function f: A — B is called an into function if at least one element in. Bis not an image of some element of set A i.e., Range of f Cset B.Onto function One-one funeti Bijective function: Constant function: Frequency distribution: Class limits Histogram Arithmetic mean Deviation Identity function: A function /: A — Bis called an onto function if every element of set B is an image of at least one element of set A i.e., Range of f= set B. A function f: A —> Bis called one-one function if all distinct elements of A have distinct images in B Arule f: A Bis called bijective function iff function fis one-one and onto. A function f: A —> B is called a constant function if Vx € A. There is an element C¢ B such that f(x) = C. A function f: A — A is called Identity function if V x € A we can associate some unique image element x itself such that fO)=x red, A frequency distribution is a tabular arrangement classifying data into different groups, (@) The minimum and the maximum values defined for a class or group are called class limits, (b) The real class limits of a class is called class boundary. Itis obtained by adding two successive class limits and dividing the sum by 2. (©) Fora given class the average of that class obtained by dividing the sum of upper and lower class limit by 2, is called the ‘midpoint or class mark of that class. (@ The total of frequency up to an upper class limit or boundary is called the cumulative frequency. A Histogram is a graph of adjacent rectangles constructed on X¥-plane. Arithmetic mean is a measure that determines a value of the variable under study by dividing the sum of all values of the variable by their number. A Deviation is defined as ‘a difference of any value of the variable from any constant’, Dj =.x)— A. Geometric mean of a variable X is the n* positive root of the product of the 5,25, %,y.ocne0r%, Observations. In symbols we write,Harmonic mean Mode: Median: Dispersion: Range: Variance: Standard deviation: Degree: GM = (43 kyo t Harmonic mean refers to the value obtained by reciprocating the mean of the reciprocal of %,23,X)....:0::4%, Observations. Mode is defined as the most frequent occurring observation of the variable or data, Mode = L+ xh fh ‘Median is the measure which determines the middlemost observation in a data set Median=L+"{"_¢ F\2 Statistically, Dispersion means the spread or scatterness of observations in a data set. Range measures the extent of variation between two extreme observations of a data set. It is given by the formula: Range = Xmux — Xia =X — Xo Variance is defined as the mean of the squared deviations of x, (i= 1,2, ...., m) observations from their arithmetic mean. In symbols, (xX) Variance of X = Var (X) = S? Standard deviation is defined as the positive square root of mean of the squared deviations of X,(/ = 1, 2, ...., m) observations from their arithmetic mean. In symbols we write, Standard Deviation of X= S.D (X) If we divide the circumference of a circle into 360 equal ares. Then the angle subtended at the centre of the circle by one arc is called one degree and is denoted by 1°. ‘The angle subtended at the centre of the circle by an arc, whose length is equal to the radius of the circle, is called one radian.Relationship between radian and degree measure: Relation between angle, arc length and radit Area of a circular sector Coterminal angle: Quadrantal angle: Standard posit Trigonometric ratios: ‘Trigonometric Identities: Zero dimension: Obtuse angle: Right angle Acute: 0 ai 1° = 7p radian degrees. Relation between central angle and arc length of a circle: Area ofa circular sector, A=4,20 ‘Two or more than two angles with the same initial and terminal sides are called coterminal angles. An angle is called a quadrantal angle, if its terminal side lies on the x- axis or y-axis, ‘A general angle is said to be in standard position if its vertex is at the origin and its initial side is directed along the positive direction of the x- axis of a rectangular coordinate system. ‘There are six fundamental trigonometric ratios (functions) called sine, cosine, tangent, cotangent, secant and cosecant Trigonometric Identities(a) _cos6+ sin®@ = 1 (bo) sec?@ — tan (©) cosee?@-co’a The projection of a given point on a line is the foot of |. drawn from the point on that line, However the projection of given point P on a line AB is the point P itself. The projection of a finite line on an other line is the portion of the latter intercepted between the projection of ends of the given finite line. However projection of a vertical line on an other line is the join of these two intersecting lines which is of zero dimension. ‘An angle which is greater than 90° is called obtuse angle. An angle which is equal to 90° is called right angle. ‘An angle which is less than 90° is called acute angle.Circumference: Circular area: Collinear points: Circumcirlee: Secant: Tangent: Length of a tangent: Sector: Central angle: Circumangle: Chord: Cyclic quadrilateral: In-centre: A circle is the locus of a moving point P in a plane which is equidistant from some fixed point N. The fixed paint N not lying on the circle is called the centre and the constant distance PN is called its radius. 2nr is the circumference of a circle with radius r. ‘tr? is the circular area of a circle of radius r. ‘The points lying on the same line ate collinear points otherwise they are non-collinear points. ‘The circle passing through the vertices of a triangle is calle its circumcirlce where bisectors of sides of the triangle provides the centre, A secant is a st line which cuts the circumference of a circle in two distinct points. A tangent to a citcle is the St line which meets the circumference at one point only and being produced does not cut it at all. The point of tangency is also known as the point of contact. AB is the tangent line to the circle C. The length ofa tangent to a citcle is measured from the given point to the point of contact. ‘The sector of a circle is an area bounded by any two radii and the arc intercepted between them, A central angle is subtended by two radii at the centre of the circle. A circumangle is subtended between any two chords of a circle, having ‘common point on its circumference. The join of any two points on the circumference of the circle is called its chord. A quadrilateral is called cyclic when a circle can be drawn through its four vertices: In-centre of a triangle isthe centre of a circle inscribed in a triangle.Circle: Radius: Perimeter: circumference Diameter: Are: ‘Triangle: Polygon: Circumscribed circle: Escribed circle: Circum circle: Regular polygon: A “circle” is locus of a moving point in a plane which is equidistant from a fixed point, The fixed point is called “centre” of the circle. ‘The distance from the centre of the circle to any point on the circle is called radius of the circle, The perimeter of a closed geometric figure is the sum of its sides. ‘The perimeter or length of the boundary of the circle is called the circumference. Acchord which passes through the centre of the circle is called diameter of the circle, A part of circumference of a circle is called an arc. A plane figure formed by three straight edges as its sides is called a triangle, A plane figure with three or more straight edges as its sides is called a polygon. A figure bounded by equal straight lines which has all its angles equal is called a regular polygon. ‘The comers of a polygon are called its vertices. ‘The path of an object moving according to some rule, is the locus of the object. Ifa circle passes through all the vertices of a polygon the circle is said to be circumscribed about the polygon and the polygon is said to be inscribed in the circle. If 2 circle touches one side of a triangle extemally and the other two produced sides intemally, is called eseribed circle. The circle passing through the vertices of triangle ABC is known as circum circle, its radius as circum radius and centre as circum centre. A circle which touches the three sides of a triangle internally is known as in-cirele its radius as in-radius and centre as in-centre.A Alternando 58 Angle of depression 166 Angle of elevation 166 Angle in standard position 154 Antecedent 50 Appolonius theorem 175 Appropriate problems 24 Are’ 180 Area of a circular sector 151 Arithmetic mean 118 Associative property 89. B Basic Statistics 107 Bijective Function 101 Binary relation 99 Biquadratic 38 c Cartesian product 8 Central angle 206 Central tendency 118 Central value 118 Chord 180 Circle 180 Circum-centre 224 Circumeirice 180 Circumference 180 Circumseribed circle 224 Class boundaries 110 Class limits 110 Co-domain 99, Co-efficients 2,30,79 ‘Common tangent 232, ‘Commutative property 88 ‘Complement of set 87 ‘Completing square ‘Complex cube roots, ‘Componendo ‘Componendo-dividendo Concentrric circles Convergent lines Congruent ‘Congruent circles Consequent Continued proportion Correspondence Corresponding ares Coterminal angles Cube roots of unity Cubic equation Cumulative frequency D Data De Morgan's laws Degree Denominator Depressed equation Diameter Dillerence of sets Direct method Direct variation Discriminant Dispersion Distributive property Dividend Dividendo Domain E-centre E-circle 23 59 180 236 185, 203 50 58 101 204 153 22 37 110,115 108 90 146 8 37 183 86 118 33 19 136 89 36 60 99 226 226Eguidistant Equilateral triangle Equal circles Exadii Escribed circle Exponential equations Externally Extraneous roots Extremes F Factorization Formation of quadratic equation Fourth proportional Fraction Frequency distribution Frequency polygon Function 6 General angle ‘Geometric mean Grouped data H Harmonie mean Hexagon Histograms Identity Imaginary Improper fraction Indirect methods In-centre Initial side Injective function Inscribed circle Internally Intersecting circles Intersection of sets 226 232 226 225 10 195 12,13, 52 32 7 15 108 14 99 153 18 120 118 207 ui rt) 15 19 225 146 101 21s 196 234 86 Inverse variation Invertendo 59 Irrational 19 SKU Joint variation 64. K-method 66 Linear equation 2 Linear factors 2,78 M Minor sector 180 Major segment 180 Mapping 99 Mean proportion 37 Mean us ‘Median 1s Midpoint 110 Minor arc 204 Major arc 204 Minor segment 180 Mode us N Nature of the roots 19 Non collinear points 181 Non-repeated 80 o Obtuse in Ordered pairs 39,98 Order 50 P Partial fractions 74.16 Perfect square 19,20 Perpendicular bisectors 183 Polygon 116,222 Polynomial 35 Product of the roots 26,28 Projection 176 Proper fraction 8Proportion, Pure quadratic Pythagorean theorem, Q Quadrantal angle Quadrants Quadratic expression Quadratic equations Quadratic formula Quadrilateral Quartiles Quotient Radial segment Radian Radical equation Radius Range Ratio Rational fraction Reciprocal equations Reciprocal identities Reducible Remainder Resultant fraction Right bisectors Roots Secant Second degree Sector of a circle Semi-circle Sets Sexagesimal Simultaneous equations Solution, Properties of cube roots of unity 23 St 2,3 157 155 155 19 215 118 36 180 148, 12 180 99,147 50 15 156 36 16 19 190 150,180 214 86,89 146 39 ‘Square roots ‘Standard deviation Standard form Standard position Sum of the roots Supplementary Surjective function Symmetric functions Synthetic division System of equations T Tally matks Tangent Tangent to a circle Terminal side Third proportional Touching circles ‘Transverse Trigonomettic identities Trigonomettic ratios u ‘Unequal circles ‘Ungrouped data Union of sets Units viz Variable Variance Variations Venn diagrams Zeros of polynomial 137 154 26,27 25 101 30 35 39 108 229 190,229 146 37 234 233 163, 153 233 18 89 50 137 53 37REFEREN( BOOK; Oxford Mathematics by Teh Kong Seng, Loh Chengyez, Published by: Ameena Saiyed Oxford University Press Karachi. Oxford Additional Mathematics by Ho Soo Thong, Khor Nyak Hiony, Published by: Pan Pacific Publishing Singapore. National Curriculum Level 9 & 10 by K.M. Vickers and M.J. Tipler, Published by: Canterbury Educational Ltd. Great Britain. Fundamental Algebra and Trigonometry by Robert G. Stein Published by: Nelson-Hall Chicago (USA). ‘A New Sequence of Geometry for School by Johan Gray, Published by: Great Educational Co. Ltd. London. Dil's New Geometry by Khawaja Dil Muhammad, Published by: Khawaja Book Depot, Lahore. Discovering Algebra by Russell F. Jacobs, Published by: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, New York (USA). Elementary Geometry by C. Goatrey & A.W Siddons, Published by: Cambridge University Press. Complete Mathematics by indian Edition 2009 Published in: New Dehli India. Pak Geometry by M. Hassan Rathoor and Dr. Zia-ud-din.